* ld.texinfo (@node MMIX): For the __.MMIX.start. prefix, only
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
e7fc76dd 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 5@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 6@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
7@include configdoc.texi
8@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 9@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 10@c man end
252b5132
RH
11
12@c @smallbook
13
ff5dcc92
SC
14@macro gcctabopt{body}
15@code{\body\}
16@end macro
17
0285c67d
NC
18@c man begin NAME
19@ifset man
20@c Configure for the generation of man pages
21@set UsesEnvVars
22@set GENERIC
0285c67d 23@set ARM
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
3c3bdf30 29@set MMIX
2469cfa2 30@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
31@set POWERPC
32@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
33@set Renesas
34@set SPU
35@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 36@set WIN32
e0001a05 37@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
38@end ifset
39@c man end
40
252b5132
RH
41@ifinfo
42@format
43START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
44* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
45END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
46@end format
47@end ifinfo
48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
0e9517a9 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
ad22bfe8 572001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 58
cf055d54
NC
59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 65@end copying
252b5132
RH
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 69@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 70@titlepage
71ba23f6 71@title The GNU linker
252b5132 72@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
252b5132
RH
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 94Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
ad22bfe8 952002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d
NC
97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54
NC
119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 121section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
143@ifset HPPA
144* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
145@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
146@ifset M68HC11
147* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
152@ifset POWERPC
153* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
154@end ifset
155@ifset POWERPC64
156* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
158@ifset SPU
159* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
160@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
161@ifset TICOFF
162* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
163@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
164@ifset WIN32
165* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
166@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
167@ifset XTENSA
168* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
169@end ifset
252b5132
RH
170@end ifclear
171@ifclear SingleFormat
172* BFD:: BFD
173@end ifclear
174@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
175
176* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
177* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 178* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 179* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 180@end menu
84ec0e6d 181@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
182
183@node Overview
184@chapter Overview
185
186@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
187@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 188
0879a67a 189@ifset man
0285c67d 190@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 191ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
192@c man end
193
194@c man begin SEEALSO
195ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
196the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
197@file{ld}.
198@c man end
199@end ifset
200
201@c man begin DESCRIPTION
202
ff5dcc92 203@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 204their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 205compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
208a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
209to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
210
0285c67d
NC
211@ifset man
212@c For the man only
ece2d90e 213This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
214@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
215language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
216@end ifset
217
252b5132 218@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
219This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
220to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
221write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
222@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
223available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
224@end ifclear
225
226Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
227linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
228execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 229@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
230(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
231
0285c67d
NC
232@c man end
233
252b5132
RH
234@node Invocation
235@chapter Invocation
236
0285c67d
NC
237@c man begin DESCRIPTION
238
ff5dcc92 239The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
240and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
241you have many choices to control its behavior.
242
0285c67d
NC
243@c man end
244
252b5132
RH
245@ifset UsesEnvVars
246@menu
247* Options:: Command Line Options
248* Environment:: Environment Variables
249@end menu
250
251@node Options
252@section Command Line Options
253@end ifset
254
255@cindex command line
256@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
257
258@c man begin OPTIONS
259
252b5132
RH
260The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
261practice few of them are used in any particular context.
262@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 263For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
264object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
265link a file @code{hello.o}:
266
267@smallexample
268ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
269@end smallexample
270
ff5dcc92 271This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
272result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
273the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
274directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
275
ff5dcc92 276Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
277point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
278as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
279which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
280files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
281different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
282occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
283option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
284noted in the descriptions below.
285
286@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
287Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
288together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
289options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
290an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
291
292Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
293specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
294and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
295are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
296message @samp{No input files}.
297
36f63dca 298If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
299assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
300augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
301linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
302permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
303or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
304@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
305script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
306extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
307to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
308the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
309
310For options whose names are a single letter,
311option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
312whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
313option that requires them.
314
315For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 316precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 317@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 318this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 319only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
320@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
321name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
322output.
323
324Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
325option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
326immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
327@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
328Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
329accepted.
252b5132 330
36f63dca
NC
331Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
332(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
333prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
334compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
335
336@smallexample
337 gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
338@end smallexample
339
340This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
341silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
342
343Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
344linker:
345
ff5dcc92 346@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 347@include at-file.texi
dff70155 348
252b5132
RH
349@kindex -a@var{keyword}
350@item -a@var{keyword}
351This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
352argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
353@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
354@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
355to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
356
357@ifset I960
358@cindex architectures
359@kindex -A@var{arch}
360@item -A@var{architecture}
361@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
362@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
363In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
364Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
365@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
366the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 367archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
368family}, for details.
369
ff5dcc92 370Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
371other architecture families.
372@end ifset
373
374@ifclear SingleFormat
375@cindex binary input format
376@kindex -b @var{format}
377@kindex --format=@var{format}
378@cindex input format
379@cindex input format
380@item -b @var{input-format}
381@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
382@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
383file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 384@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 385that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 386configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 387to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
388default input format the most usual format on each machine.
389@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
390supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
391formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
392@xref{BFD}.
393
394You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
395binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
396linking object files of different formats), by including
397@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 398particular format.
252b5132
RH
399
400The default format is taken from the environment variable
401@code{GNUTARGET}.
402@ifset UsesEnvVars
403@xref{Environment}.
404@end ifset
405You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
406@code{TARGET};
407@ifclear man
408see @ref{Format Commands}.
409@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
410@end ifclear
411
412@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
413@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
414@cindex compatibility, MRI
415@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
416@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 417For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 418files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
419@ifclear man
420@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
421@end ifclear
422@ifset man
423the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
424@end ifset
425Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 426the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
427scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
428If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
429specified by any @samp{-L} options.
430
431@cindex common allocation
432@kindex -d
433@kindex -dc
434@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 435@item -d
252b5132
RH
436@itemx -dc
437@itemx -dp
438These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
439compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
440even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
441script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
442@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
443
444@cindex entry point, from command line
445@kindex -e @var{entry}
446@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 447@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
448@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
449Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
450program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
451named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
452and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
453base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
454@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
455and other ways of specifying the entry point.
456
b58f81ae
DJ
457@kindex --exclude-libs
458@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
459Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
460exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
461@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
462automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
463port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
464explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
465option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
466be treated as hidden.
467
252b5132
RH
468@cindex dynamic symbol table
469@kindex -E
470@kindex --export-dynamic
471@item -E
472@itemx --export-dynamic
473When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
474dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
475which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
476
477If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
478contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
479mentioned in the link.
480
481If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
482back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
483dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
484linking the program itself.
485
55255dae 486You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 487be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 488See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 489
36f63dca 490@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
491@cindex big-endian objects
492@cindex endianness
493@kindex -EB
494@item -EB
495Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
496
497@cindex little-endian objects
498@kindex -EL
499@item -EL
500Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 501@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
502
503@kindex -f
504@kindex --auxiliary
505@item -f
506@itemx --auxiliary @var{name}
507When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
508to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
509table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
510symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
511
512If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
513run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
514the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
515first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
516@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
517in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
518Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
519implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
520machine specific performance.
521
522This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
523will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
524
525@kindex -F
526@kindex --filter
527@item -F @var{name}
528@itemx --filter @var{name}
529When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
530the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
531of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
532on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
533
534If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
535run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
536dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
537filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
538found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
539used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
540@var{name}.
541
ff5dcc92 542Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 543toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
544object files.
545@ifclear SingleFormat
546The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 547@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 548@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
549environment variable.
550@end ifclear
551The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
552creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 553
3dbf70a2
MM
554@cindex finalization function
555@kindex -fini
556@item -fini @var{name}
557When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
558executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
559address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
560the function to call.
561
252b5132
RH
562@kindex -g
563@item -g
564Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
565
566@kindex -G
567@kindex --gpsize
568@cindex object size
569@item -G@var{value}
570@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
571Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
572@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
573MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
574sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
575
576@cindex runtime library name
577@kindex -h@var{name}
578@kindex -soname=@var{name}
579@item -h@var{name}
580@itemx -soname=@var{name}
581When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
582the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
583which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
584linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
585field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
586
587@kindex -i
588@cindex incremental link
589@item -i
590Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
591
3dbf70a2
MM
592@cindex initialization function
593@kindex -init
594@item -init @var{name}
595When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
596executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
597of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
598function to call.
599
252b5132 600@cindex archive files, from cmd line
bcb674cf
RS
601@kindex -l@var{namespec}
602@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
603@item -l@var{namespec}
604@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
605Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
606list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
607If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
608will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
609will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 610
ff5dcc92 611On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
612files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
613and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
614called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
615@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
616indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
617to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
618@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
619
620The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
621specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
622was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
623command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
624archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
625the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
626
ff5dcc92 627See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
628archives multiple times.
629
630You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
631
632@ifset GENERIC
633This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 634if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
635behaviour of the AIX linker.
636@end ifset
637
638@cindex search directory, from cmd line
639@kindex -L@var{dir}
640@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
a1ab1d2a 641@item -L@var{searchdir}
252b5132 642@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
643Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
644for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
645option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
646in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
647on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 648@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
252b5132
RH
649order in which the options appear.
650
9c8ebd6a
DJ
651If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
652by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
653
252b5132
RH
654@ifset UsesEnvVars
655The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 656@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
657some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
658@end ifset
659
660The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
661@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
662at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
663
664@cindex emulation
665@kindex -m @var{emulation}
666@item -m@var{emulation}
667Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
668emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
669
670If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
671@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
672
673Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
674configured.
675
676@cindex link map
677@kindex -M
678@kindex --print-map
679@item -M
680@itemx --print-map
681Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
682information about the link, including the following:
683
684@itemize @bullet
685@item
3b83e13a 686Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
687@item
688How common symbols are allocated.
689@item
690All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
691which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
692@item
693The values assigned to symbols.
694
695Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
696involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
697have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
698linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
699of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
700the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
701linker script containing:
702
703@smallexample
704 foo = 1
705 foo = foo * 4
706 foo = foo + 8
707@end smallexample
708
709will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
710option is used:
711
712@smallexample
713 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
714 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
715 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
716@end smallexample
717
718See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
719scripts.
252b5132
RH
720@end itemize
721
722@kindex -n
723@cindex read-only text
724@cindex NMAGIC
725@kindex --nmagic
726@item -n
727@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 728Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 729@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
730
731@kindex -N
732@kindex --omagic
733@cindex read/write from cmd line
734@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 735@item -N
252b5132
RH
736@itemx --omagic
737Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
738not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
739libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
740mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
741is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
742specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
743
744@kindex --no-omagic
745@cindex OMAGIC
746@item --no-omagic
747This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
748sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
749be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
750shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
751
752@kindex -o @var{output}
753@kindex --output=@var{output}
754@cindex naming the output file
755@item -o @var{output}
756@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 757Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
758option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
759script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
760
761@kindex -O @var{level}
762@cindex generating optimized output
763@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 764If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 765the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
766should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
767option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
768the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
769no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
770of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 771
a712da20
NC
772@kindex -q
773@kindex --emit-relocs
774@cindex retain relocations in final executable
775@item -q
776@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 777Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
778Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
779order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
780in larger executables.
781
dbab7a7b
NC
782This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
783
4f471f39
RS
784@kindex --force-dynamic
785@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
786@item --force-dynamic
787Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
788to VxWorks targets.
789
252b5132
RH
790@cindex partial link
791@cindex relocatable output
792@kindex -r
1049f94e 793@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 794@item -r
1049f94e 795@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 796Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 797turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
798linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
799magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
800@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 801@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
802If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
803linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
804constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
805
62bf86b4
HPN
806When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
807partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
808relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
809example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
810with input files in other formats at all.
811
252b5132
RH
812This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
813
814@kindex -R @var{file}
815@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
816@cindex symbol-only input
817@item -R @var{filename}
818@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
819Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
820relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
821to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
822programs. You may use this option more than once.
823
ff5dcc92 824For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 825followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 826the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
827
828@kindex -s
829@kindex --strip-all
830@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 831@item -s
252b5132
RH
832@itemx --strip-all
833Omit all symbol information from the output file.
834
835@kindex -S
836@kindex --strip-debug
837@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 838@item -S
252b5132
RH
839@itemx --strip-debug
840Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
841
842@kindex -t
843@kindex --trace
844@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 845@item -t
252b5132 846@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 847Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
848
849@kindex -T @var{script}
850@kindex --script=@var{script}
851@cindex script files
852@item -T @var{scriptfile}
853@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
854Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 855@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 856@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
857output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
858the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
859specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
860options accumulate.
252b5132 861
14be8564
L
862@kindex -dT @var{script}
863@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
864@cindex script files
865@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
866@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
867Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
868
869This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
870processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
871command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
872@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
873behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
874command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
875the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
876@samp{gcc}).
877
252b5132
RH
878@kindex -u @var{symbol}
879@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
880@cindex undefined symbol
881@item -u @var{symbol}
882@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
883Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
884symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
885modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
886different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
887option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
888
889@kindex -Ur
890@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 891@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
892For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
893@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 894turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
895@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
896It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
897with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
898be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
899@samp{-r} for the others.
900
577a0623
AM
901@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
902@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
903Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
904@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
905missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
906specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
907multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
908input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
909in a linker script.
a854a4a7 910
252b5132
RH
911@kindex -v
912@kindex -V
913@kindex --version
914@cindex version
915@item -v
916@itemx --version
917@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 918Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
919lists the supported emulations.
920
921@kindex -x
922@kindex --discard-all
923@cindex deleting local symbols
924@item -x
925@itemx --discard-all
926Delete all local symbols.
927
928@kindex -X
929@kindex --discard-locals
930@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 931@item -X
252b5132 932@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
933Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
934system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
935or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
936
937@kindex -y @var{symbol}
938@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
939@cindex symbol tracing
940@item -y @var{symbol}
941@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
942Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
943option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
944to prepend an underscore.
945
946This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
947don't know where the reference is coming from.
948
949@kindex -Y @var{path}
950@item -Y @var{path}
951Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
952for Solaris compatibility.
953
954@kindex -z @var{keyword}
955@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
956The recognized keywords are:
957@table @samp
958
959@item combreloc
960Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
961lookup caching possible.
962
963@item defs
560e09e9 964Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 965shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 966
6aa29e7b
JJ
967@item execstack
968Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
969
cd6d6c15
NC
970@item initfirst
971This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
972It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
973before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
974the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
975the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
976objects.
977
978@item interpose
979Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
980but the primary executable.
981
5fa222e4
AM
982@item lazy
983When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
984dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
985the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
986Lazy binding is the default.
987
cd6d6c15
NC
988@item loadfltr
989Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
990runtime.
991
992@item muldefs
993Allows multiple definitions.
994
995@item nocombreloc
996Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
997
998@item nocopyreloc
999Disables production of copy relocs.
1000
1001@item nodefaultlib
1002Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1003ignore any default library search paths.
1004
1005@item nodelete
1006Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1007
1008@item nodlopen
1009Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1010
1011@item nodump
1012Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1013
6aa29e7b
JJ
1014@item noexecstack
1015Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1016
1017@item norelro
1018Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1019
cd6d6c15
NC
1020@item now
1021When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1022dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1023when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1024deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1025first called.
1026
1027@item origin
1028Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1029
6aa29e7b
JJ
1030@item relro
1031Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1032
24718e3b
L
1033@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1034Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1035
1036@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1037Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1038
cd6d6c15
NC
1039@end table
1040
ece2d90e 1041Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1042
1043@kindex -(
1044@cindex groups of archives
1045@item -( @var{archives} -)
1046@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1047The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1048either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1049
1050The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1051references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1052the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1053archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1054object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1055would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1056they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1057resolved.
1058
1059Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1060it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1061more archives.
1062
69da35b5
NC
1063@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1064@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1065@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1066@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1067Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1068recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1069and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1070the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1071behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1072so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1073restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1074
4a43e768
AM
1075@kindex --as-needed
1076@kindex --no-as-needed
1077@item --as-needed
1078@itemx --no-as-needed
1079This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1080on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1081the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1082on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
77cfaee6
AM
1083needed. @option{--as-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags to only be emitted
1084for libraries that satisfy some symbol reference from regular objects
1085which is undefined at the point that the library was linked.
4a43e768
AM
1086@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1087
e56f61be
L
1088@kindex --add-needed
1089@kindex --no-add-needed
1090@item --add-needed
1091@itemx --no-add-needed
1092This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1093DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1094the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1095a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1096@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1097for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1098the default behaviour.
1099
252b5132
RH
1100@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1101@item -assert @var{keyword}
1102This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1103
1104@kindex -Bdynamic
1105@kindex -dy
1106@kindex -call_shared
1107@item -Bdynamic
1108@itemx -dy
1109@itemx -call_shared
1110Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1111for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1112default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1113for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1114multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1115@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1116
a1ab1d2a
UD
1117@kindex -Bgroup
1118@item -Bgroup
1119Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1120section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1121object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1122@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1123only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1124
252b5132
RH
1125@kindex -Bstatic
1126@kindex -dn
1127@kindex -non_shared
1128@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1129@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1130@itemx -dn
1131@itemx -non_shared
1132@itemx -static
1133Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1134platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1135variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1136may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1137library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1138option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1139option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1140shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1141references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1142libraries.
252b5132
RH
1143
1144@kindex -Bsymbolic
1145@item -Bsymbolic
1146When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1147definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1148for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1149within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1150platforms which support shared libraries.
1151
40b36307
L
1152@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1153@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1154When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1155symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1156This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1157libraries.
1158
55255dae
L
1159@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1160@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1161Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1162typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1163global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1164within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1165to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1166in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1167which support shared libraries.
1168
1169The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1170scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1171
40b36307
L
1172@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1173@item --dynamic-list-data
1174Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1175
1176@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1177@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1178Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1179is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1180
0b8a70d9
L
1181@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1182@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1183Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1184
252b5132
RH
1185@kindex --check-sections
1186@kindex --no-check-sections
1187@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1188@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1189Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1190been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1191perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1192suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1193allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1194restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
252b5132
RH
1195
1196@cindex cross reference table
1197@kindex --cref
1198@item --cref
1199Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1200generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1201Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1202
1203The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1204easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1205sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1206symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1207definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1208
4818e05f
AM
1209@cindex common allocation
1210@kindex --no-define-common
1211@item --no-define-common
1212This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1213The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1214@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1215
1216The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1217the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1218of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1219forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1220Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1221from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1222This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1223and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1224duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1225paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1226
252b5132
RH
1227@cindex symbols, from command line
1228@kindex --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1229@item --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1230Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1231address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1232times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1233limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1234context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1235symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1236constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1237using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1238Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1239space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1240@var{expression}.
1241
1242@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1243@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1244@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1245@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1246@itemx --no-demangle
1247These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1248and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1249present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1250underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1251mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1252different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1253to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1254demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1255is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1256
1257@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1258@kindex -I@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1259@kindex --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1260@item --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1261Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1262generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1263linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1264doing.
1265
7ce691ae 1266@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1267@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1268@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1269@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1270Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1271with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1272
252b5132
RH
1273@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1274@item --force-exe-suffix
1275Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1276
1277If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1278@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1279the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1280option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1281Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1282it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1283
1284@kindex --gc-sections
1285@kindex --no-gc-sections
1286@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1287@item --gc-sections
1288@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1289Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1290targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1291performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1292@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1293
d5465ba2
AM
1294@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1295examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1296symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1297command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1298referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1299libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1300referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1301the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1302relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1303
ac69cbc6
TG
1304This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1305@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1306specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1307a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1308
c17d87de
NC
1309@kindex --print-gc-sections
1310@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1311@cindex garbage collection
1312@item --print-gc-sections
1313@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1314List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1315printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1316collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1317default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1318be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1319line.
1320
252b5132
RH
1321@cindex help
1322@cindex usage
1323@kindex --help
1324@item --help
1325Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1326
ea20a7da
CC
1327@kindex --target-help
1328@item --target-help
1329Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1330
252b5132
RH
1331@kindex -Map
1332@item -Map @var{mapfile}
1333Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1334@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1335
1336@cindex memory usage
1337@kindex --no-keep-memory
1338@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1339@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1340symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1341instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1342necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1343while linking a large executable.
1344
1345@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1346@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1347@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1348@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1349Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1350is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1351The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1352behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1353libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1354
aa713662
L
1355@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1356@kindex -z muldefs
1357@item --allow-multiple-definition
1358@itemx -z muldefs
1359Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1360report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1361first definition will be used.
1362
b79e8c78 1363@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1364@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1365@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1366@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
560e09e9
NC
1367Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1368This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1369determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1370shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1371how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1372
1373The reason that @option{--allow-shlib-undefined} is the default is that
1374the shared library being specified at link time may not be the same as
1375the one that is available at load time, so the symbols might actually be
ae9a127f 1376resolvable at load time. Plus there are some systems, (eg BeOS) where
560e09e9 1377undefined symbols in shared libraries is normal. (The kernel patches
ece2d90e 1378them at load time to select which function is most appropriate
560e09e9
NC
1379for the current architecture. This is used for example to dynamically
1380select an appropriate memset function). Apparently it is also normal
1381for HPPA shared libraries to have undefined symbols.
b79e8c78 1382
31941635
L
1383@kindex --no-undefined-version
1384@item --no-undefined-version
1385Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1386it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1387will be issued instead.
1388
3e3b46e5
PB
1389@kindex --default-symver
1390@item --default-symver
1391Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1392exported symbols.
1393
1394@kindex --default-imported-symver
1395@item --default-imported-symver
1396Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1397imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1398
252b5132
RH
1399@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1400@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1401Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1402files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1403been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1404This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1405errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1406have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1407inappropriate.
1408
fe7929ce
AM
1409@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1410@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1411Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1412library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1413
252b5132
RH
1414@kindex --no-whole-archive
1415@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1416Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1417archive files.
1418
1419@cindex output file after errors
1420@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1421@item --noinhibit-exec
1422Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1423Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1424errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1425when it issues any error whatsoever.
1426
0a9c1c8e
CD
1427@kindex -nostdlib
1428@item -nostdlib
1429Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1430command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1431(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1432
252b5132
RH
1433@ifclear SingleFormat
1434@kindex --oformat
1435@item --oformat @var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1436@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1437file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1438@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1439object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1440object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1441should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1442usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1443name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1444list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1445command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1446this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1447@end ifclear
1448
36af4a4e
JJ
1449@kindex -pie
1450@kindex --pic-executable
1451@item -pie
1452@itemx --pic-executable
1453@cindex position independent executables
1454Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1455ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1456libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1457address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1458normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1459defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1460
252b5132
RH
1461@kindex -qmagic
1462@item -qmagic
1463This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1464
1465@kindex -Qy
1466@item -Qy
1467This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1468
1469@kindex --relax
1470@cindex synthesizing linker
1471@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1472@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1473An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1474@ifset GENERIC
1475This option is only supported on a few targets.
1476@end ifset
1477@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1478@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1479@end ifset
1480@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1481@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1482@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1483@ifset XTENSA
1484@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1485@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1486@ifset M68HC11
1487@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1488@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1489@ifset POWERPC
1490@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1491@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1492
1493On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1494optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1495in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1496instructions in the output object file.
1497
1498On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1499debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1500@ifset GENERIC
1501This is known to be
1502the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1503@end ifset
1504
1505@ifset GENERIC
1506On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1507but ignored.
1508@end ifset
1509
1510@cindex retaining specified symbols
1511@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1512@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1513@item --retain-symbols-file @var{filename}
1514Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1515discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1516symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1517@ifset GENERIC
1518(such as VxWorks)
1519@end ifset
1520where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1521run-time memory.
1522
1523@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1524or symbols needed for relocations.
1525
1526You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1527line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1528
1529@ifset GENERIC
1530@item -rpath @var{dir}
1531@cindex runtime library search path
1532@kindex -rpath
1533Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1534linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1535arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1536them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1537also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1538objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1539@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1540ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1541@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1542
ff5dcc92 1543The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1544SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1545@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1546runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1547options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1548gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1549file systems.
252b5132 1550
ff5dcc92 1551For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1552followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1553the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1554@end ifset
1555
1556@ifset GENERIC
1557@cindex link-time runtime library search path
1558@kindex -rpath-link
1559@item -rpath-link @var{DIR}
1560When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1561happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1562of the input files.
1563
1564When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1565non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1566shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1567explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1568specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1569@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1570either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1571appearing multiple times.
1572
28c309a2
NC
1573This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1574that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1575is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1576runtime linker would do.
1577
252b5132 1578The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1579libraries:
252b5132
RH
1580@enumerate
1581@item
ff5dcc92 1582Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1583@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1584Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1585between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1586specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1587used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1588at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1589by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1590the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1591@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1592On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1593@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1594environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1595@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1596On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1597directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1598@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1599For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1600variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1601@item
ec4eb78a
L
1602For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1603@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1604libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1605@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1606@item
252b5132
RH
1607The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1608@item
1609For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1610exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1611@end enumerate
1612
1613If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1614warning and continue with the link.
1615@end ifset
1616
1617@kindex -shared
1618@kindex -Bshareable
1619@item -shared
1620@itemx -Bshareable
1621@cindex shared libraries
1622Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1623and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1624shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1625undefined symbols in the link.
1626
de7dd2bd 1627@item --sort-common [= ascending | descending]
252b5132 1628@kindex --sort-common
de7dd2bd
NC
1629This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1630ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1631sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1632eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1633between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1634specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1635
bcaa7b3e
L
1636@kindex --sort-section name
1637@item --sort-section name
1638This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1639patterns in the linker script.
1640
1641@kindex --sort-section alignment
1642@item --sort-section alignment
1643This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1644patterns in the linker script.
1645
252b5132 1646@kindex --split-by-file
a854a4a7 1647@item --split-by-file [@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1648Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1649each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1650size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1651
1652@kindex --split-by-reloc
a854a4a7
AM
1653@item --split-by-reloc [@var{count}]
1654Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1655output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1656This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1657certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1658cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1659that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1660support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1661input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1662more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1663many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1664
1665@kindex --stats
1666@item --stats
1667Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1668as execution time and memory usage.
1669
e2243057
RS
1670@kindex --sysroot
1671@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1672Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1673configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1674that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1675
252b5132
RH
1676@kindex --traditional-format
1677@cindex traditional format
1678@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1679For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1680the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1681use the traditional format instead.
1682
1683@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1684For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1685symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1686full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1687@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1688trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1689combine duplicate entries.
1690
176355da
NC
1691@kindex --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1692@item --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1693Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1694address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1695times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1696line.
1697@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1698for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1699@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1700should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1701sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1702
252b5132
RH
1703@kindex -Tbss @var{org}
1704@kindex -Tdata @var{org}
1705@kindex -Ttext @var{org}
1706@cindex segment origins, cmd line
1707@item -Tbss @var{org}
1708@itemx -Tdata @var{org}
1709@itemx -Ttext @var{org}
a6e02871
AO
1710Same as --section-start, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1711@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1712
560e09e9
NC
1713@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1714@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1715Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1716values for @samp{method}:
1717
1718@table @samp
1719@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1720Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1721
1722@item report-all
da8bce14 1723Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1724
1725@item ignore-in-object-files
1726Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1727ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1728
1729@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1730Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1731ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1732when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1733libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1734command line.
1735@end table
1736
1737The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1738by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1739
1740Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1741unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1742can change this to a warning.
1743
252b5132
RH
1744@kindex --verbose
1745@cindex verbose
1746@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1747@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1748Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1749supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1750the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1751
1752@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1753@cindex version script, symbol versions
1754@itemx --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1755Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1756used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1757about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1758is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1759@xref{VERSION}.
1760
7ce691ae 1761@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1762@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1763@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1764@item --warn-common
1765Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1766a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1767but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1768you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1769Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1770warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1771
1772There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1773
1774@table @samp
1775@item int i = 1;
1776A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1777file.
1778
1779@item extern int i;
1780An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1781There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1782variable somewhere.
1783
1784@item int i;
1785A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1786variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1787The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1788single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1789size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1790a definition of the same variable.
1791@end table
1792
1793The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1794Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1795just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1796encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1797a common symbol.
1798
1799@enumerate
1800@item
1801Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1802definition for the symbol.
1803@smallexample
1804@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1805 overridden by definition
1806@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1807@end smallexample
1808
1809@item
1810Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1811the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1812except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1813@smallexample
1814@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1815 overriding common
1816@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1817@end smallexample
1818
1819@item
1820Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1821@smallexample
1822@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1823 of `@var{symbol}'
1824@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1825@end smallexample
1826
1827@item
1828Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1829@smallexample
1830@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1831 overridden by larger common
1832@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1833@end smallexample
1834
1835@item
1836Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1837the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1838encountered in a different order.
1839@smallexample
1840@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1841 overriding smaller common
1842@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1843@end smallexample
1844@end enumerate
1845
1846@kindex --warn-constructors
1847@item --warn-constructors
1848Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1849object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1850detect the use of global constructors.
1851
1852@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1853@item --warn-multiple-gp
1854Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1855This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1856Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1857section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1858of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1859base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1860base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1861bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1862large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1863values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1864option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1865
1866@kindex --warn-once
1867@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1868@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1869@item --warn-once
1870Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1871which refers to it.
1872
1873@kindex --warn-section-align
1874@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1875@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1876@item --warn-section-align
1877Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1878alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1879The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1880is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1881the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1882
8fdd7217
NC
1883@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1884@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1885Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1886
560e09e9
NC
1887@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1888@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1889If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1890@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1891This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1892
1893@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1894@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1895This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1896it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1897
252b5132
RH
1898@kindex --whole-archive
1899@cindex including an entire archive
1900@item --whole-archive
1901For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1902@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1903in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1904files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1905library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1906library. This option may be used more than once.
1907
7ec229ce 1908Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1909about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1910Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1911list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1912your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1913
252b5132
RH
1914@kindex --wrap
1915@item --wrap @var{symbol}
1916Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1917@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1918undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1919@var{symbol}.
1920
1921This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1922wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1923wishes to call the system function, it should call
1924@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1925
1926Here is a trivial example:
1927
1928@smallexample
1929void *
cc2f008e 1930__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1931@{
cc2f008e 1932 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1933 return __real_malloc (c);
1934@}
1935@end smallexample
1936
ff5dcc92 1937If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1938all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1939instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1940call the real @code{malloc} function.
1941
1942You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 1943links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
1944you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1945file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1946call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1947
6aa29e7b
JJ
1948@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
1949@item --eh-frame-hdr
1950Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
1951@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
1952
6c1439be
L
1953@kindex --enable-new-dtags
1954@kindex --disable-new-dtags
1955@item --enable-new-dtags
1956@itemx --disable-new-dtags
1957This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
1958systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
1959@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
1960If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
1961created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
1962those options are only available for ELF systems.
1963
2d643429 1964@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 1965@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
1966Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
1967close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
1968time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
1969increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
1970value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
1971
fdc90cb4
JJ
1972@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
1973@item --hash-style=@var{style}
1974Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
1975@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
1976new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
1977the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
1978hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
1979
35835446
JR
1980@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
1981@item --reduce-memory-overheads
1982This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 1983linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 1984for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
1985about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
1986
4f9c04f7 1987Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 19881021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 1989run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
1990has been used.
1991
1992The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
1993enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 1994
c0065db7
RM
1995@kindex --build-id
1996@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
1997@item --build-id
1998@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
1999Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2000The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2001file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2002@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2003parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2004@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2005@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2006an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2007characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2008omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2009
2010The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2011that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2012unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2013to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2014file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2015string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2016
2017Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2018@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2019@end table
2020
0285c67d
NC
2021@c man end
2022
36f63dca 2023@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2024
0285c67d
NC
2025@c man begin OPTIONS
2026
ff5dcc92 2027The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2028the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2029normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2030use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2031@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2032like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2033symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2034object file).
2035
2036In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2037support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2038PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2039values by either a space or an equals sign.
2040
ff5dcc92 2041@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2042
2043@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2044@item --add-stdcall-alias
2045If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2046as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2047[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2048
2049@kindex --base-file
2050@item --base-file @var{file}
2051Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2052addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2053@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2054[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2055
2056@kindex --dll
2057@item --dll
2058Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2059@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2060file.
bb10df36 2061[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2062
2063@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2064@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2065@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2066@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2067If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2068do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2069only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2070resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2071undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2072@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2073to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2074warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2075import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2076to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2077feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2078@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2079mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2080[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2081
2082@cindex DLLs, creating
2083@kindex --export-all-symbols
2084@item --export-all-symbols
2085If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2086be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2087otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2088explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2089attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2090option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2091@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2092@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2093exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2094re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2095such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2096@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2097@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2098Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2099not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2100extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2101(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2102These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2103@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2104@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2105@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2106@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2107[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2108
2109@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2110@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2111Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2112exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2113[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2114
2115@kindex --file-alignment
2116@item --file-alignment
2117Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2118file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2119512.
bb10df36 2120[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2121
2122@cindex heap size
2123@kindex --heap
2124@item --heap @var{reserve}
2125@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2126Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2127to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2128committed.
bb10df36 2129[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2130
2131@cindex image base
2132@kindex --image-base
2133@item --image-base @var{value}
2134Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2135the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2136is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2137your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2138other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2139for dlls.
bb10df36 2140[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2141
2142@kindex --kill-at
2143@item --kill-at
2144If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2145symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2146[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2147
26d2d8a2
BF
2148@kindex --large-address-aware
2149@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2150If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2151header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2152greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2153or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2154section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2155[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2156
252b5132
RH
2157@kindex --major-image-version
2158@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2159Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2160[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2161
2162@kindex --major-os-version
2163@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2164Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2165[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2166
2167@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2168@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2169Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2170[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2171
2172@kindex --minor-image-version
2173@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2174Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2175[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2176
2177@kindex --minor-os-version
2178@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2179Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2180[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2181
2182@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2183@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2184Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2185[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2186
2187@cindex DEF files, creating
2188@cindex DLLs, creating
2189@kindex --output-def
2190@item --output-def @var{file}
2191The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2192file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2193(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2194library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2195automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2196[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2197
b044cda1
CW
2198@cindex DLLs, creating
2199@kindex --out-implib
2200@item --out-implib @var{file}
2201The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2202import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2203import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2204may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2205makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2206creation step.
bb10df36 2207[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2208
2209@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2210@item --enable-auto-image-base
2211Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2212using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2213from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2214collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2215avoided.
bb10df36 2216[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2217
2218@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2219@item --disable-auto-image-base
2220Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2221user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2222default.
bb10df36 2223[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2224
2225@cindex DLLs, linking to
2226@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2227@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2228When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2229search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2230@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2231between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2232uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2233@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2234[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2235
2236@kindex --enable-auto-import
2237@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2238Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2239DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2240building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2241'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2242to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2243specification published by Microsoft.
2244
e2a83dd0
NC
2245Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2246data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2247placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2248around a problem with consts that is described here:
2249http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2250
4d8907ac
DS
2251Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2252see this message:
0d888aac 2253
ece2d90e 2254"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2255documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2256
ece2d90e
NC
2257This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2258ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2259allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2260fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2261constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2262multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2263this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2264of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2265the warning, and exit.
2266
2267There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2268data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2269
2fa9fc65
NC
2270One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2271of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2272this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2273
c0065db7
RM
2274A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2275that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2276there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2277a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2278
2279@example
2280extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2281extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2282 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2283@end example
2284
2285or
2286
2287@example
2288extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2289extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2290 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2291@end example
2292
c0065db7 2293For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2294is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2295
2296@example
2297extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2298extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2299 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2300@end example
2301
c406afaf
NC
2302or
2303
2304@example
2305extern long long extern_ll;
2306extern_ll -->
2307 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2308@end example
2309
2fa9fc65 2310A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2311'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2312@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2313requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2314building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2315merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2316between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2317constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2318
2319Original:
2320@example
2321--foo.h
2322extern int arr[];
2323--foo.c
2324#include "foo.h"
2325void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2326 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2327@}
2328@end example
2329
2330Solution 1:
2331@example
2332--foo.h
2333extern int arr[];
2334--foo.c
2335#include "foo.h"
2336void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2337 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2338 volatile int *parr = arr;
2339 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2340@}
2341@end example
2342
2343Solution 2:
2344@example
2345--foo.h
2346/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2347#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2348 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2349#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2350#else
2351#define FOO_IMPORT
2352#endif
2353extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2354--foo.c
2355#include "foo.h"
2356void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2357 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2358@}
2359@end example
2360
c0065db7 2361A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2362library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2363for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2364functions).
bb10df36 2365[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2366
2367@kindex --disable-auto-import
2368@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2369Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2370@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2371[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2372
2fa9fc65
NC
2373@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2374@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2375If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2376that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2377a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2378environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2379[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2380
2381@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2382@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2383Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2384DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2385[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2386
b044cda1
CW
2387@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2388@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2389Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2390[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2391
252b5132
RH
2392@kindex --section-alignment
2393@item --section-alignment
2394Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2395addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2396[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2397
2398@cindex stack size
2399@kindex --stack
2400@item --stack @var{reserve}
2401@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2402Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2403to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2404committed.
bb10df36 2405[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2406
2407@kindex --subsystem
2408@item --subsystem @var{which}
2409@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2410@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2411Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2412legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2413@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2414the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2415@var{which}.
bb10df36 2416[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2417
2418@end table
2419
0285c67d
NC
2420@c man end
2421
93fd0973
SC
2422@ifset M68HC11
2423@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2424
2425@c man begin OPTIONS
2426
2427The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2428memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2429
2430@table @gcctabopt
2431
2432@kindex --no-trampoline
2433@item --no-trampoline
2434This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2435is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2436instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2437
2438@kindex --bank-window
2439@item --bank-window @var{name}
2440This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2441the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2442The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2443paging and addresses within the memory window.
2444
2445@end table
2446
2447@c man end
2448@end ifset
2449
7fb9f789
NC
2450@ifset M68K
2451@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2452
2453@c man begin OPTIONS
2454
2455The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2456when linking for 68K targets.
2457
2458@table @gcctabopt
2459
2460@kindex --got
2461@item --got=@var{type}
2462This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2463@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2464@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2465Info entry for @file{ld}.
2466
2467@end table
2468
2469@c man end
2470@end ifset
2471
252b5132
RH
2472@ifset UsesEnvVars
2473@node Environment
2474@section Environment Variables
2475
0285c67d
NC
2476@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2477
560e09e9 2478You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2479@ifclear SingleFormat
2480@code{GNUTARGET},
2481@end ifclear
2482@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2483
36f63dca 2484@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2485@kindex GNUTARGET
2486@cindex default input format
2487@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2488use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2489of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2490@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2491of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2492attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2493this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2494there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2495object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2496BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2497in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2498@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2499
2500@kindex LDEMULATION
2501@cindex default emulation
2502@cindex emulation, default
2503@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2504@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2505behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2506available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2507the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2508variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2509linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2510
2511@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2512@cindex demangling, default
2513Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2514@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2515default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2516a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2517may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2518options.
2519
0285c67d
NC
2520@c man end
2521@end ifset
2522
252b5132
RH
2523@node Scripts
2524@chapter Linker Scripts
2525
2526@cindex scripts
2527@cindex linker scripts
2528@cindex command files
2529Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2530written in the linker command language.
2531
2532The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2533the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2534the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2535more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2536direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2537described below.
2538
2539The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2540yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2541linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2542to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2543such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2544
2545You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2546line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2547default linker script.
2548
2549You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2550to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2551Linker Scripts}.
2552
2553@menu
2554* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2555* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2556* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2557* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2558* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2559* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2560* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2561* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2562* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2563* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2564* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2565@end menu
2566
2567@node Basic Script Concepts
2568@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2569@cindex linker script concepts
2570We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2571describe the linker script language.
2572
2573The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2574file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2575@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2576The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2577purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2578among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2579section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2580in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2581
2582Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2583also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2584contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2585the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2586A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2587area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2588loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2589which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2590of debugging information.
2591
2592Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2593first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2594the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2595@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2596section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2597same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2598is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2599(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2600based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2601RAM address would be the VMA.
2602
2603You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2604program with the @samp{-h} option.
2605
2606Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2607@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2608has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2609information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2610will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2611static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2612referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2613
2614You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2615program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2616option.
2617
2618@node Script Format
2619@section Linker Script Format
2620@cindex linker script format
2621Linker scripts are text files.
2622
2623You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2624either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2625symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2626generally ignored.
2627
2628Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2629If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2630otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2631double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2632file name.
2633
2634You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2635@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2636to whitespace.
2637
2638@node Simple Example
2639@section Simple Linker Script Example
2640@cindex linker script example
2641@cindex example of linker script
2642Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2643
2644The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2645@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2646memory layout of the output file.
2647
2648The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2649describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2650code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2651@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2652Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2653your input files.
2654
2655For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
26560x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2657linker script which will do that:
2658@smallexample
2659SECTIONS
2660@{
2661 . = 0x10000;
2662 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2663 . = 0x8000000;
2664 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2665 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2666@}
2667@end smallexample
2668
2669You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2670followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2671descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2672
252b5132
RH
2673The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2674sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2675counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2676other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2677current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2678incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2679@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2680
2681The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2682required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2683after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2684which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2685wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2686means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2687
2688Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2689@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2690@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2691
2692The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2693the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2694at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2695output section, the value of the location counter will be
2696@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2697effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2698immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2699
2700The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2701alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2702example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2703sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2704may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2705sections.
2706
2707That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2708
2709@node Simple Commands
2710@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2711@cindex linker script simple commands
2712In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2713
2714@menu
2715* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2716* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2717@ifclear SingleFormat
2718* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2719@end ifclear
2720
2721* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2722@end menu
2723
2724@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2725@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2726@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2727@cindex start of execution
2728@cindex first instruction
2729@cindex entry point
2730The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2731point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2732entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2733@smallexample
2734ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2735@end smallexample
2736
2737There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2738entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2739stopping when one of them succeeds:
2740@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2741@item
252b5132 2742the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2743@item
252b5132 2744the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2745@item
252b5132 2746the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2747@item
252b5132 2748the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2749@item
252b5132
RH
2750The address @code{0}.
2751@end itemize
2752
2753@node File Commands
36f63dca 2754@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2755@cindex linker script file commands
2756Several linker script commands deal with files.
2757
2758@table @code
2759@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2760@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2761@cindex including a linker script
2762Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2763be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2764with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
276510 levels deep.
2766
2767@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2768@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2769@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2770@cindex input files in linker scripts
2771@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2772@cindex linker script input object files
2773The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2774in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2775
2776For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2777a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2778then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2779
2780In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2781script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2782
e3f2db7f
AO
2783In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2784with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2785located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2786for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2787open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2788linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2789description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2790
ff5dcc92 2791If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2792name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2793@samp{-l}.
2794
2795When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2796files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2797script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2798
2799@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2800@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2801@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2802@cindex grouping input files
2803The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2804files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2805new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2806in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2807
b717d30e
JJ
2808@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2809@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2810@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2811This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2812commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2813as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2814with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2815when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2816@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2817and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2818setting afterwards.
2819
252b5132
RH
2820@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2821@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2822@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2823The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2824@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2825@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2826Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2827precedence.
2828
2829You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2830output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2831
2832@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2833@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2834@cindex library search path in linker script
2835@cindex archive search path in linker script
2836@cindex search path in linker script
2837The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2838@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2839@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2840on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2841are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2842the command line option are searched first.
2843
2844@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2845@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2846@cindex first input file
2847The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2848that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2849though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2850when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2851first file.
2852@end table
2853
2854@ifclear SingleFormat
2855@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2856@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2857A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2858
2859@table @code
2860@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2861@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2862@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2863@cindex output file format in linker script
2864The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2865output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2866exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2867(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2868line option takes precedence.
2869
2870You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2871formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2872This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2873desired endianness.
2874
2875If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2876will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2877output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2878used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2879
2880For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2881command:
2882@smallexample
2883OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2884@end smallexample
2885This says that the default format for the output file is
2886@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
2887option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
2888format.
2889
2890@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2891@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2892@cindex input file format in linker script
2893The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2894files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
2895This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2896(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
2897is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
2898command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
2899@end table
2900@end ifclear
2901
2902@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 2903@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
2904There are a few other linker scripts commands.
2905
2906@table @code
2907@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
2908@kindex ASSERT
2909@cindex assertion in linker script
2910Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
2911with an error code, and print @var{message}.
2912
2913@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
2914@kindex EXTERN
2915@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
2916Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
2917symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
2918modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
2919each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
2920command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
2921
2922@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2923@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2924@cindex common allocation in linker script
2925This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 2926to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
2927output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
2928
4818e05f
AM
2929@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2930@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2931@cindex common allocation in linker script
2932This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
2933command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
2934to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
2935
53d25da6
AM
2936@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
2937@kindex INSERT
2938@cindex insert user script into default script
2939This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
2940augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
2941inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
2942@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
2943default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
2944sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
2945linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
2946insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
2947linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
2948default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
2949of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
2950to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
2951is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
2952
2953@smallexample
2954SECTIONS
2955@{
2956 OVERLAY :
2957 @{
2958 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
2959 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
2960 @}
2961@}
2962INSERT AFTER .text;
2963@end smallexample
2964
252b5132
RH
2965@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
2966@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
2967@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 2968This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
2969references among certain output sections.
2970
2971In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
2972using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
2973will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
2974errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
2975a function defined in the other section.
2976
2977The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 2978@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
2979an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
2980@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
2981names.
2982
2983@ifclear SingleFormat
2984@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
2985@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
2986@cindex machine architecture
2987@cindex architecture
2988Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
2989of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
2990architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
2991the @samp{-f} option.
2992@end ifclear
2993@end table
2994
2995@node Assignments
2996@section Assigning Values to Symbols
2997@cindex assignment in scripts
2998@cindex symbol definition, scripts
2999@cindex variables, defining
3000You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3001the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3002
3003@menu
3004* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3005* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3006* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3007* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3008@end menu
3009
3010@node Simple Assignments
3011@subsection Simple Assignments
3012
3013You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3014
3015@table @code
3016@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3017@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3018@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3019@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3020@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3021@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3022@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3023@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3024@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3025@end table
3026
3027The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3028@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3029defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3030
3031The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3032may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3033
3034The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3035
3036Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3037
3038You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3039statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3040section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3041
3042The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3043expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3044
3045Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3046assignments may be used:
3047
3048@smallexample
3049floating_point = 0;
3050SECTIONS
3051@{
3052 .text :
3053 @{
3054 *(.text)
3055 _etext = .;
3056 @}
156e34dd 3057 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3058 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3059@}
3060@end smallexample
3061@noindent
3062In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3063zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3064the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3065defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3066upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3067
3068@node PROVIDE
3069@subsection PROVIDE
3070@cindex PROVIDE
3071In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3072only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3073the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3074@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3075@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3076@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3077@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3078@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3079
3080Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3081@smallexample
3082SECTIONS
3083@{
3084 .text :
3085 @{
3086 *(.text)
3087 _etext = .;
3088 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3089 @}
3090@}
3091@end smallexample
3092
3093In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3094underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3095the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3096underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3097If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3098linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3099
7af8e998
L
3100@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3101@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3102@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3103Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3104hidden and won't be exported.
3105
73ae6183
NC
3106@node Source Code Reference
3107@subsection Source Code Reference
3108
3109Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3110intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3111a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3112symbol that does not have a value.
3113
3114Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3115transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3116stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3117prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3118mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3119of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3120variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3121linker script variable might be referred to as:
3122
3123@smallexample
3124 extern int foo;
3125@end smallexample
3126
3127But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3128
3129@smallexample
3130 _foo = 1000;
3131@end smallexample
3132
3133In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3134transformation has taken place.
3135
3136When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3137things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3138in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3139second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3140table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3141contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3142value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3143
3144@smallexample
3145 int foo = 1000;
3146@end smallexample
3147
3148creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3149holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3150number 1000 is initially stored.
3151
3152When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3153first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3154memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3155So:
3156
3157@smallexample
3158 foo = 1;
3159@end smallexample
3160
3161looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3162associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3163address. Whereas:
3164
3165@smallexample
3166 int * a = & foo;
3167@end smallexample
3168
3169looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3170and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3171the variable @samp{a}.
3172
3173Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3174the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3175an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3176
3177@smallexample
3178 foo = 1000;
3179@end smallexample
3180
3181creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3182the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3183address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3184linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3185access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3186
3187Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3188you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3189use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3190section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3191linker script contains these declarations:
3192
3193@smallexample
3194@group
3195 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3196 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3197 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3198@end group
3199@end smallexample
3200
3201Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3202
3203@smallexample
3204@group
3205 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3206
73ae6183
NC
3207 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3208@end group
3209@end smallexample
3210
3211Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3212
252b5132 3213@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3214@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3215@kindex SECTIONS
3216The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3217into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3218
3219The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3220@smallexample
3221SECTIONS
3222@{
3223 @var{sections-command}
3224 @var{sections-command}
3225 @dots{}
3226@}
3227@end smallexample
3228
3229Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3230
3231@itemize @bullet
3232@item
3233an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3234@item
3235a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3236@item
3237an output section description
3238@item
3239an overlay description
3240@end itemize
3241
3242The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3243@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3244those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3245understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3246the layout of the output file.
3247
3248Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3249below.
3250
3251If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3252linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3253section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3254input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3255example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3256in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3257
3258@menu
3259* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3260* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3261* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3262* Input Section:: Input section description
3263* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3264* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3265* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3266* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3267* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3268@end menu
3269
3270@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3271@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3272The full description of an output section looks like this:
3273@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3274@group
7e7d5768 3275@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3276 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3277 @{
3278 @var{output-section-command}
3279 @var{output-section-command}
3280 @dots{}
562d3460 3281 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3282@end group
3283@end smallexample
3284
3285Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3286
3287The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3288name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3289The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3290
3291Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3292
3293@itemize @bullet
3294@item
3295a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3296@item
3297an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3298@item
3299data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3300@item
3301a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3302@end itemize
3303
3304@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3305@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3306@cindex name, section
3307@cindex section name
3308The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3309meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3310support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3311must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3312example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3313output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3314names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3315quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3316characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3317commas must be quoted.
3318
3319The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3320Discarding}.
3321
3322@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3323@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3324@cindex address, section
3325@cindex section address
3326The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3327address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3328the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3329based on the current value of the location counter.
3330
3331If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3332set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3333@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3334current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3335requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3336output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3337within the output section.
3338
3339For example,
3340@smallexample
3341.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3342@end smallexample
3343@noindent
3344and
3345@smallexample
3346.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3347@end smallexample
3348@noindent
3349are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3350@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3351counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3352counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3353section.
3354
3355The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3356For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3357so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3358do something like this:
3359@smallexample
3360.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3361@end smallexample
3362@noindent
3363This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3364aligned upward to the specified value.
3365
3366Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3367location counter.
3368
3369@node Input Section
36f63dca 3370@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3371@cindex input sections
3372@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3373The most common output section command is an input section description.
3374
3375The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3376You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3377in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3378map the input files into your memory layout.
3379
3380@menu
3381* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3382* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3383* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3384* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3385* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3386@end menu
3387
3388@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3389@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3390@cindex input section basics
3391An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3392by a list of section names in parentheses.
3393
3394The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3395describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3396
3397The most common input section description is to include all input
3398sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3399include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3400@smallexample
3401*(.text)
3402@end smallexample
3403@noindent
18625d54
CM
3404Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3405of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3406match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3407example:
252b5132 3408@smallexample
b4346c09 3409*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3410@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3411will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3412@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3413
3414There are two ways to include more than one section:
3415@smallexample
3416*(.text .rdata)
3417*(.text) *(.rdata)
3418@end smallexample
3419@noindent
3420The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3421@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3422first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3423they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3424@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3425@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3426
3427You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3428You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3429needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3430@smallexample
3431data.o(.data)
3432@end smallexample
3433
967928e9
AM
3434You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3435matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3436with no whitespace around the colon.
3437
3438@table @samp
3439@item archive:file
3440matches file within archive
3441@item archive:
3442matches the whole archive
3443@item :file
3444matches file but not one in an archive
3445@end table
3446
3447Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3448wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3449single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3450@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3451within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3452also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3453other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3454from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3455command.
3456
252b5132
RH
3457If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3458the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3459commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3460@smallexample
3461data.o
3462@end smallexample
3463
967928e9
AM
3464When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3465and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3466characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3467name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3468did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3469though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3470@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3471the archive search path.
3472
3473@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3474@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3475@cindex input section wildcards
3476@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3477@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3478@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3479In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3480name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3481
3482The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3483pattern for the file name.
3484
3485The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3486
3487@table @samp
3488@item *
3489matches any number of characters
3490@item ?
3491matches any single character
3492@item [@var{chars}]
3493matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3494character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3495@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3496@item \
3497quotes the following character
3498@end table
3499
3500When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3501will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3502Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3503exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3504@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3505a @samp{/} character.
3506
3507File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3508specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3509does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3510
3511If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3512appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3513will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3514sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3515@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3516@smallexample
3517.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3518.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3519@end smallexample
3520
bcaa7b3e 3521@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3522Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3523in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3524this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3525pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3526@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3527into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3528
bcaa7b3e
L
3529@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3530@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3531difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3532ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3533
3534@cindex SORT
3535@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3536
3537When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3538can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3539
3540@enumerate
3541@item
3542@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3543It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3544sections have the same name.
3545@item
3546@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3547It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3548sections have the same alignment.
3549@item
c0065db7 3550@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3551treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3552@item
3553@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3554is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3555@item
3556All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3557@end enumerate
3558
3559When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3560section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3561takes precedence over the command line option.
3562
3563If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3564command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3565treated as nested sorting command.
3566
3567@enumerate
3568@item
3569@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3570@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3571@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3572@item
3573@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3574@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3575@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3576@end enumerate
3577
3578If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3579command line option will be ignored.
3580
252b5132
RH
3581If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3582@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3583precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3584
3585This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3586files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3587sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3588The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3589with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3590linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3591@smallexample
3592@group
3593SECTIONS @{
3594 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3595 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3596 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3597 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3598@}
3599@end group
3600@end smallexample
3601
3602@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3603@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3604@cindex common symbol placement
3605@cindex uninitialized data placement
3606A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3607file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3608linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3609named @samp{COMMON}.
3610
3611You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3612other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3613particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3614input files are placed in another section.
3615
3616In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3617@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3618@smallexample
3619.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3620@end smallexample
3621
3622@cindex scommon section
3623@cindex small common symbols
3624Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3625example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3626symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3627different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3628the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3629symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3630to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3631locations.
3632
3633@cindex [COMMON]
3634You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3635notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3636@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3637
3638@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3639@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3640@cindex KEEP
3641@cindex garbage collection
3642When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3643it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3644This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3645with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3646@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3647
3648@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3649@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3650The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3651to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3652start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3653@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3654follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3655@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3656@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3657All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3658files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3659
3660@smallexample
3661@group
3662SECTIONS @{
3663 outputa 0x10000 :
3664 @{
3665 all.o
3666 foo.o (.input1)
3667 @}
36f63dca
NC
3668@end group
3669@group
252b5132
RH
3670 outputb :
3671 @{
3672 foo.o (.input2)
3673 foo1.o (.input1)
3674 @}
36f63dca
NC
3675@end group
3676@group
252b5132
RH
3677 outputc :
3678 @{
3679 *(.input1)
3680 *(.input2)
3681 @}
3682@}
3683@end group
a1ab1d2a 3684@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3685
3686@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3687@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3688@cindex data
3689@cindex section data
3690@cindex output section data
3691@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3692@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3693@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3694@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3695@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3696You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3697@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3698an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3699parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3700value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3701counter.
3702
3703The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3704store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3705bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3706stored.
3707
3708For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3709of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3710@smallexample
3711BYTE(1)
3712LONG(addr)
3713@end smallexample
3714
3715When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3716same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3717target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3718@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3719@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3720
3721If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3722which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3723When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3724true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3725endianness of the first input object file.
3726
36f63dca 3727Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
3728between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3729@smallexample
3730SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3731@end smallexample
3732whereas this will work:
3733@smallexample
3734SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3735@end smallexample
3736
252b5132
RH
3737@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
3738@cindex holes, filling
3739@cindex unspecified memory
3740You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
3741current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
3742otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3743gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 3744with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
3745necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
3746point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
3747than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
3748different parts of an output section.
3749
3750This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 3751value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 3752@smallexample
563e308f 3753FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
3754@end smallexample
3755
3756The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 3757section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
3758part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
3759entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 3760precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 3761expression.
252b5132
RH
3762
3763@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 3764@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
3765There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3766commands.
3767
3768@table @code
3769@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3770@cindex input filename symbols
3771@cindex filename symbols
3772@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3773The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
3774The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
3775file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
3776the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
3777
3778This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
3779normally used for any other object file format.
3780
3781@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
3782@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
3783@cindex constructors, arranging in link
3784@item CONSTRUCTORS
3785When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
3786unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
3787destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
3788arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
3789automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
3790For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
3791linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
3792@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
3793ignored for other object file formats.
3794
3795The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
3796constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
3797Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
3798the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
3799first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
3800of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
3801compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
3802formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
3803@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
3804the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
3805destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
3806@code{exit}.
3807
3808For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
3809arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
3810addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
3811and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
3812linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
3813runtime code expects to see.
3814
3815@smallexample
3816 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
3817 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3818 *(.ctors)
3819 LONG(0)
3820 __CTOR_END__ = .;
3821 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
3822 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3823 *(.dtors)
3824 LONG(0)
3825 __DTOR_END__ = .;
3826@end smallexample
3827
3828If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
3829which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
3830are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
3831are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
3832command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
3833@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
3834@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
3835@samp{*(.dtors)}.
3836
3837Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
3838and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
3839need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
3840scripts.
3841
3842@end table
3843
3844@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 3845@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
3846@cindex discarding sections
3847@cindex sections, discarding
3848@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
3849The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
3850for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
3851be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 3852@smallexample
49c13adb 3853.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
3854@end smallexample
3855@noindent
3856will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
3857@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
3858sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
3859space in an output section will also create the output section.
3860
a0976ea4 3861The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
3862on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
3863symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
3864the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
3865section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
3866
3867@cindex /DISCARD/
3868The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
3869input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
3870section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
3871
3872@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 3873@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
3874@cindex output section attributes
3875We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
3876like this:
3877@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3878@group
7e7d5768 3879@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3880 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3881 @{
3882 @var{output-section-command}
3883 @var{output-section-command}
3884 @dots{}
562d3460 3885 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3886@end group
3887@end smallexample
3888We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
3889@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
3890remaining section attributes.
3891
a1ab1d2a 3892@menu
252b5132
RH
3893* Output Section Type:: Output section type
3894* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 3895* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 3896* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
3897* Output Section Region:: Output section region
3898* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
3899* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
3900@end menu
3901
3902@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 3903@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
3904Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
3905parentheses. The following types are defined:
3906
3907@table @code
3908@item NOLOAD
3909The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
3910loaded into memory when the program is run.
3911@item DSECT
3912@itemx COPY
3913@itemx INFO
3914@itemx OVERLAY
3915These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
3916rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
3917marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
3918section when the program is run.
3919@end table
3920
3921@kindex NOLOAD
3922@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
3923@cindex loading, preventing
3924The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
3925the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
3926the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
3927@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
3928need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
3929@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
3930@smallexample
3931@group
3932SECTIONS @{
3933 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
3934 @dots{}
3935@}
3936@end group
3937@end smallexample
3938
3939@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 3940@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 3941@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
3942@kindex AT(@var{lma})
3943@cindex load address
3944@cindex section load address
3945Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
3946@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
3947an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
3948Address}).
3949
dc0b6aa0
AM
3950The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
3951the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
3952
3953Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
3954specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
3955Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
3956linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
3957
3958If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
3959section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
3960VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
3961section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
3962or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
3963to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 3964@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
3965
3966@cindex ROM initialized data
3967@cindex initialized data in ROM
3968This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
3969example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
3970called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
3971@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
3972even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
3973uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
3974defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
3975counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
3976
3977@smallexample
3978@group
3979SECTIONS
3980 @{
3981 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 3982 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
3983 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
3984 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
3985 .bss 0x3000 :
3986 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
3987@}
3988@end group
3989@end smallexample
3990
3991The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
3992this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
3993the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
3994how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
3995script.
3996
3997@smallexample
3998@group
3999extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4000char *src = &_etext;
4001char *dst = &_data;
4002
4003/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4004while (dst < &_edata) @{
4005 *dst++ = *src++;
4006@}
4007
4008/* Zero bss */
4009for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4010 *dst = 0;
4011@end group
4012@end smallexample
4013
bbf115d3
L
4014@node Forced Output Alignment
4015@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4016@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4017@cindex forcing output section alignment
4018@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4019You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4020
7e7d5768
AM
4021@node Forced Input Alignment
4022@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4023@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4024@cindex forcing input section alignment
4025@cindex input section alignment
4026You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4027SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4028sections, whether larger or smaller.
4029
252b5132 4030@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4031@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4032@kindex >@var{region}
4033@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4034@cindex memory regions and sections
4035You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4036using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4037
4038Here is a simple example:
4039@smallexample
4040@group
4041MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4042SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4043@end group
4044@end smallexample
4045
4046@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4047@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4048@kindex :@var{phdr}
4049@cindex section, assigning to program header
4050@cindex program headers and sections
4051You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4052using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4053one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4054assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4055@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4056linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4057
4058Here is a simple example:
4059@smallexample
4060@group
4061PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4062SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4063@end group
4064@end smallexample
4065
4066@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4067@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4068@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4069@cindex section fill pattern
4070@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4071You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4072@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4073(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4074within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4075alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4076necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4077of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4078an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4079fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4080other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4081pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4082expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4083
4084You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4085output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4086
4087Here is a simple example:
4088@smallexample
4089@group
563e308f 4090SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4091@end group
4092@end smallexample
4093
4094@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4095@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4096@kindex OVERLAY
4097@cindex overlays
4098An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4099are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4100the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4101copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4102required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4103can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4104than another.
4105
4106Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4107@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4108output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4109command is as follows:
4110@smallexample
4111@group
4112OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4113 @{
4114 @var{secname1}
4115 @{
4116 @var{output-section-command}
4117 @var{output-section-command}
4118 @dots{}
4119 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4120 @var{secname2}
4121 @{
4122 @var{output-section-command}
4123 @var{output-section-command}
4124 @dots{}
4125 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4126 @dots{}
4127 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4128@end group
4129@end smallexample
4130
4131Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4132section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4133section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4134those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4135except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4136sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4137
4138The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4139addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4140memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4141whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4142and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4143and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4144
4145If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4146among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4147all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4148section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4149NOCROSSREFS}.
4150
4151For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4152provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4153defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4154@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4155the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4156within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4157symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4158
4159At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4160the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4161
4162Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4163@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4164@smallexample
4165@group
4166 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4167 @{
4168 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4169 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4170 @}
4171@end group
4172@end smallexample
4173@noindent
4174This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4175address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4176@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4177following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4178@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4179@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4180
4181C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4182like the following.
4183
4184@smallexample
4185@group
4186 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4187 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4188 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4189@end group
4190@end smallexample
4191
4192Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4193everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4194example could have been written identically as follows.
4195
4196@smallexample
4197@group
4198 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4199 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4200 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4201 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4202 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4203 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4204 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4205@end group
4206@end smallexample
4207
4208@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4209@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4210@kindex MEMORY
4211@cindex memory regions
4212@cindex regions of memory
4213@cindex allocating memory
4214@cindex discontinuous memory
4215The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4216memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4217
4218The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4219memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4220may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4221can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4222set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4223regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4224around to fit into the available regions.
4225
4226A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4227command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4228you wish. The syntax is:
4229@smallexample
4230@group
a1ab1d2a 4231MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4232 @{
4233 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4234 @dots{}
4235 @}
4236@end group
4237@end smallexample
4238
4239The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4240region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4241Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4242with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4243must have a distinct name.
4244
4245@cindex memory region attributes
4246The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4247whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4248not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4249@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4250section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4251the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4252them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4253
4254The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4255@table @samp
4256@item R
4257Read-only section
4258@item W
4259Read/write section
4260@item X
4261Executable section
4262@item A
4263Allocatable section
4264@item I
4265Initialized section
4266@item L
4267Same as @samp{I}
4268@item !
4269Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4270@end table
4271
4272If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4273@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4274attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4275in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4276attributes.
4277
4278@kindex ORIGIN =
4279@kindex o =
4280@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4281The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4282the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4283cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4284abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4285@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4286
4287@kindex LENGTH =
4288@kindex len =
4289@kindex l =
4290The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4291region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4292be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4293@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4294
4295In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4296available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4297and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4298linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4299is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4300or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4301explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4302region.
4303
4304@smallexample
4305@group
a1ab1d2a 4306MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4307 @{
4308 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4309 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4310 @}
4311@end group
4312@end smallexample
4313
4314Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4315specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4316@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4317a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4318output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4319was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4320the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4321output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4322region, the linker will issue an error message.
4323
3ec57632 4324It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4325expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4326@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4327
4328@smallexample
4329@group
c0065db7 4330 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4331@end group
4332@end smallexample
4333
252b5132
RH
4334@node PHDRS
4335@section PHDRS Command
4336@kindex PHDRS
4337@cindex program headers
4338@cindex ELF program headers
4339@cindex program segments
4340@cindex segments, ELF
4341The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4342@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4343loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4344program with the @samp{-p} option.
4345
4346When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4347reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4348program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4349This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4350interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4351
4352The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4353in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4354precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4355the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4356not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4357
4358The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4359generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4360ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4361
4362This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4363@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4364
4365@smallexample
4366@group
4367PHDRS
4368@{
4369 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4370 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4371@}
4372@end group
4373@end smallexample
4374
4375The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4376of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4377header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4378with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4379must have a distinct name.
4380
4381Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4382system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4383specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4384sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4385attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4386Section Phdr}.
4387
4388It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4389merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4390repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4391contain the section.
4392
4393If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4394then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4395not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4396convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4397placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4398default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4399segment at all.
4400
4401@kindex FILEHDR
4402@kindex PHDRS
4403You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4404the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4405The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4406file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4407include the ELF program headers themselves.
4408
4409The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4410value of the keyword.
4411
4412@table @asis
4413@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4414Indicates an unused program header.
4415
4416@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4417Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4418the file.
4419
4420@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4421Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4422
4423@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4424Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4425found.
4426
4427@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4428Indicates a segment holding note information.
4429
4430@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4431A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4432ABI.
4433
4434@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4435Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4436
4437@item @var{expression}
4438An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4439be used for types not defined above.
4440@end table
4441
4442You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4443in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4444@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4445Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4446output section attribute.
4447
4448The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4449which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4450explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4451an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4452header.
4453
4454Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4455headers used on a native ELF system.
4456
4457@example
4458@group
4459PHDRS
4460@{
4461 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4462 interp PT_INTERP ;
4463 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4464 data PT_LOAD ;
4465 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4466@}
4467
4468SECTIONS
4469@{
4470 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4471 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4472 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4473 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4474 @dots{}
4475 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4476 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4477 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4478 @dots{}
4479@}
4480@end group
4481@end example
4482
4483@node VERSION
4484@section VERSION Command
4485@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4486@cindex symbol versions
4487@cindex version script
4488@cindex versions of symbols
4489The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4490only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4491symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4492a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4493shared library.
4494
4495You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4496you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4497also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4498
4499The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4500@smallexample
4501VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4502@end smallexample
4503
4504The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4505Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4506version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4507version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4508version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4509scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4510library.
4511
4512The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4513examples.
4514
4515@smallexample
4516VERS_1.1 @{
4517 global:
4518 foo1;
4519 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4520 old*;
4521 original*;
4522 new*;
252b5132
RH
4523@};
4524
4525VERS_1.2 @{
4526 foo2;
4527@} VERS_1.1;
4528
4529VERS_2.0 @{
4530 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4531 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4532 ns::*;
4533 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4534 @}
252b5132
RH
4535@} VERS_1.2;
4536@end smallexample
4537
4538This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4539version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4540The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4541a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4542of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4543symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4544is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4545in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4546However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4547name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4548
4549Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4550depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4551to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4552
4553Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4554depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4555and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4556
4557When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4558specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4559unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4560unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
252b5132
RH
4561somewhere in the version script.
4562
4563The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4564they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4565could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4566However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4567
0f6bf451 4568Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4569in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4570symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4571won't.
4572
4573@smallexample
7c9c73be 4574@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4575@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4576
252b5132
RH
4577When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4578symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4579requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4580shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4581loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4582linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4583application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4584way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4585all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4586search for each symbol reference.
4587
4588The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4589doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4590that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4591functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4592the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4593required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4594that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4595versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4596the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4597
4598There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4599first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4600source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4601script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4602maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4603@smallexample
4604__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4605@end smallexample
4606@noindent
4607in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4608be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4609The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4610@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4611takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4612
4613The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4614function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4615an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4616version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4617linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4618
4619To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4620source file. Here is an example:
4621
4622@smallexample
4623__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4624__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4625__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4626__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4627@end smallexample
4628
4629In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4630unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4631example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4632@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4633
4634When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4635some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4636this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4637@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4638declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4639you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4640
4641If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4642within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4643(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4644specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4645
cb840a31
L
4646You can also specify the language in the version script:
4647
4648@smallexample
4649VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4650@end smallexample
4651
c0065db7 4652The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4653The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4654demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4655patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4656
86043bbb
MM
4657Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4658described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4659or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4660the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4661whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4662cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4663might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4664should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4665expect when you upgrade.
4666
252b5132
RH
4667@node Expressions
4668@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4669@cindex expressions
4670@cindex arithmetic
4671The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4672that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4673expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4674host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4675
4676You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4677
4678The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4679expressions.
4680
4681@menu
4682* Constants:: Constants
4683* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4684* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4685* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4686* Operators:: Operators
4687* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4688* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4689* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4690@end menu
4691
4692@node Constants
4693@subsection Constants
4694@cindex integer notation
4695@cindex constants in linker scripts
4696All constants are integers.
4697
4698As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4699octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
4700hexadecimal. The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
4701
4702@cindex scaled integers
4703@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4704@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4705@cindex suffixes for integers
4706@cindex integer suffixes
4707In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4708constant by
4709@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4710@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4711@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4712@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4713@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4714@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4715@tex
4716${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4717@end tex
4718@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4719respectively. For example, the following all refer to the same quantity:
4720@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4721_fourk_1 = 4K;
4722_fourk_2 = 4096;
4723_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
252b5132
RH
4724@end smallexample
4725
4726@node Symbols
4727@subsection Symbol Names
4728@cindex symbol names
4729@cindex names
4730@cindex quoted symbol names
4731@kindex "
4732Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4733and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4734Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
4735specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4736keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4737@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4738"SECTION" = 9;
4739"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
4740@end smallexample
4741
4742Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
4743to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
4744whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
4745
ecca9871
L
4746@node Orphan Sections
4747@subsection Orphan Sections
4748@cindex orphan
4749Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
4750are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
4751script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
4752output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
4753placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
4754attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
4755same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
4756If there is not enough room to do this then it places
4757at the end of the file.
4758
4759For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
4760well as section flag.
4761
41911f68 4762If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 4763the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
4764__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
4765section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
4766orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
4767representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
4768character.
4769
252b5132
RH
4770@node Location Counter
4771@subsection The Location Counter
4772@kindex .
4773@cindex dot
4774@cindex location counter
4775@cindex current output location
4776The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
4777current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
4778location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
4779within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
4780anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
4781
4782@cindex holes
4783Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
4784moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
4785location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
4786and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
4787doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
4788
4789@smallexample
4790SECTIONS
4791@{
4792 output :
4793 @{
4794 file1(.text)
4795 . = . + 1000;
4796 file2(.text)
4797 . += 1000;
4798 file3(.text)
563e308f 4799 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
4800@}
4801@end smallexample
4802@noindent
4803In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
4804located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
4805followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
4806@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 4807@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
4808specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
4809
5c6bbab8
NC
4810@cindex dot inside sections
4811Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
4812current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 4813statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
4814absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
4815however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
4816not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
4817
4818@smallexample
4819SECTIONS
4820@{
4821 . = 0x100
4822 .text: @{
4823 *(.text)
4824 . = 0x200
4825 @}
4826 . = 0x500
4827 .data: @{
4828 *(.data)
4829 . += 0x600
4830 @}
4831@}
4832@end smallexample
4833
4834The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
4835and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
4836the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
4837much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
4838move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
4839and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
4840the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
4841the @samp{.data} output section itself.
4842
b5666f2f
AM
4843@cindex dot outside sections
4844Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
4845output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
4846needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
4847
4848@smallexample
4849SECTIONS
4850@{
4851 start_of_text = . ;
4852 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4853 end_of_text = . ;
4854
4855 start_of_data = . ;
4856 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4857 end_of_data = . ;
4858@}
4859@end smallexample
4860
4861If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
4862not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
4863between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
4864should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
4865blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
4866the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
4867sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
4868statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
4869special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
4870place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
4871as follows:
4872
4873@smallexample
4874SECTIONS
4875@{
4876 start_of_text = . ;
4877 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4878 end_of_text = . ;
4879
4880 start_of_data = . ;
4881 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
4882 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4883 end_of_data = . ;
4884@}
4885@end smallexample
4886
4887This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
4888@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
4889placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
4890assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
4891a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
4892section. So you could write:
4893
4894@smallexample
4895SECTIONS
4896@{
4897 start_of_text = . ;
4898 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4899 end_of_text = . ;
4900
4901 . = . ;
4902 start_of_data = . ;
4903 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4904 end_of_data = . ;
4905@}
4906@end smallexample
4907
4908Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
4909@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
4910
252b5132
RH
4911@need 2000
4912@node Operators
4913@subsection Operators
4914@cindex operators for arithmetic
4915@cindex arithmetic operators
4916@cindex precedence in expressions
4917The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
4918the standard bindings and precedence levels:
4919@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4920@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4921@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4922@smallexample
4923precedence associativity Operators Notes
4924(highest)
49251 left ! - ~ (1)
49262 left * / %
49273 left + -
49284 left >> <<
49295 left == != > < <= >=
49306 left &
49317 left |
49328 left &&
49339 left ||
493410 right ? :
493511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
4936(lowest)
4937@end smallexample
4938Notes:
a1ab1d2a 4939(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
4940(2) @xref{Assignments}.
4941@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4942@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4943@tex
4944\vskip \baselineskip
4945%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
4946\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
4947\hrule
4948\halign
4949{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
4950height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4951&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
4952height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4953\noalign{\hrule}
4954height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4955&highest&&&&&\cr
4956% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 4957&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
4958&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
4959&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
4960&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
4961&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
4962&6&&left&&\&&\cr
4963&7&&left&&|&\cr
4964&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
4965&9&&left&&||&\cr
4966&10&&right&&? :&\cr
4967&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
4968&lowest&&&&&\cr
4969height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
4970\hrule}
4971@end tex
4972@iftex
4973{
4974@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
4975@dag@quad Prefix operators.
4976@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
4977}
4978@end iftex
4979@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4980
4981@node Evaluation
4982@subsection Evaluation
4983@cindex lazy evaluation
4984@cindex expression evaluation order
4985The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
4986an expression when absolutely necessary.
4987
4988The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
4989address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
4990regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
4991as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
4992
4993However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
4994until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
4995other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
4996for use in the symbol assignment expression.
4997
4998The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
4999assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5000allocation.
5001
5002Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5003@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5004
5005If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5006available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5007following
5008@smallexample
5009@group
5010SECTIONS
5011 @{
a1ab1d2a 5012 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5013 @{ *(.text) @}
5014 @}
5015@end group
5016@end smallexample
5017@noindent
5018will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5019address}.
5020
5021@node Expression Section
5022@subsection The Section of an Expression
5023@cindex expression sections
5024@cindex absolute expressions
5025@cindex relative expressions
5026@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5027@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5028@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5029When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5030or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5031fixed offset from the base of a section.
5032
5033The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5034whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5035an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5036section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5037
5038A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5039relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5040further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5041section will be the section of the relative expression.
5042
5043A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5044through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5045will not have any particular associated section.
5046
5047You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5048to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5049create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5050section @samp{.data}:
5051@smallexample
5052SECTIONS
5053 @{
5054 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5055 @}
5056@end smallexample
5057@noindent
5058If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5059@samp{.data} section.
5060
5061@node Builtin Functions
5062@subsection Builtin Functions
5063@cindex functions in expressions
5064The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5065use in linker script expressions.
5066
5067@table @code
5068@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5069@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5070@cindex expression, absolute
5071Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5072of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5073value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5074normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5075
5076@item ADDR(@var{section})
5077@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5078@cindex section address in expression
5079Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5080script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5081the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5082identical values:
5083@smallexample
5084@group
5085SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5086 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5087 @{
252b5132
RH
5088 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5089 @dots{}
5090 @}
5091 .output :
5092 @{
5093 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5094 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5095 @}
5096@dots{} @}
5097@end group
5098@end smallexample
5099
876f4090
NS
5100@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5101@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5102@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5103@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5104@cindex round up location counter
5105@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5106@cindex round up expression
5107@cindex align expression
5108Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5109to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5110doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5111arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5112expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5113equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5114
5115Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5116next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5117variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5118input sections:
252b5132
RH
5119@smallexample
5120@group
5121SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5122 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5123 *(.data)
5124 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5125 @}
5126@dots{} @}
5127@end group
5128@end smallexample
5129@noindent
5130The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5131a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5132a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5133of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5134
5135The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5136
362c1d1a
NS
5137@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5138@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5139@cindex section alignment
5140Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5141been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5142evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5143the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5144value in that section.
5145@smallexample
5146@group
5147SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5148 .output @{
5149 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5150 @dots{}
5151 @}
5152@dots{} @}
5153@end group
5154@end smallexample
5155
252b5132
RH
5156@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5157@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5158This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5159scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5160section.
5161
2d20f7bf
JJ
5162@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5163@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5164This is equivalent to either
5165@smallexample
5166(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5167@end smallexample
5168or
5169@smallexample
5170(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5171@end smallexample
5172@noindent
5173depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5174for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5175@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5176If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5177memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5178bytes in the on-disk file.
5179
5180This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5181any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5182@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5183be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5184working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5185
5186@noindent
5187Example:
5188@smallexample
5189 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5190@end smallexample
5191
5192@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5193@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5194This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5195evaluation purposes.
5196
5197@smallexample
5198 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5199@end smallexample
5200
a4f5ad88
JJ
5201@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5202@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5203This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5204@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5205When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5206does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5207@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5208boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5209it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5210@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5211
5212@smallexample
5213 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5214@end smallexample
5215
252b5132
RH
5216@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5217@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5218@cindex symbol defaults
5219Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5220defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5221return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5222default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5223shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5224the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5225existed, its value is preserved:
5226
5227@smallexample
5228@group
5229SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5230 .text : @{
5231 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5232 @dots{}
5233 @}
5234 @dots{}
5235@}
5236@end group
5237@end smallexample
5238
3ec57632
NC
5239@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5240@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5241Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5242
252b5132
RH
5243@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5244@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5245@cindex section load address in expression
5246Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5247the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5248attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5249Section LMA}).
5250
5251@kindex MAX
5252@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5253Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5254
5255@kindex MIN
5256@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5257Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5258
5259@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5260@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5261@cindex unallocated address, next
5262Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5263This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5264use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5265output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5266
3ec57632
NC
5267@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5268@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5269Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5270
ba916c8a
MM
5271@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5272@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5273Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5274value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5275option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5276@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5277be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5278``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5279name.
5280
252b5132
RH
5281@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5282@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5283@cindex section size
5284Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5285been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5286evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5287@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5288@smallexample
5289@group
5290SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5291 .output @{
5292 .start = . ;
5293 @dots{}
5294 .end = . ;
5295 @}
5296 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5297 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5298@dots{} @}
5299@end group
5300@end smallexample
5301
5302@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5303@itemx sizeof_headers
5304@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5305@cindex header size
5306Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5307information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5308this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5309choose, to facilitate paging.
5310
5311@cindex not enough room for program headers
5312@cindex program headers, not enough room
5313When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5314@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5315number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5316addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5317additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5318room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5319the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5320script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5321you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5322command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5323@end table
5324
5325@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5326@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5327@cindex implicit linker scripts
5328If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5329an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5330linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5331linker will report an error.
5332
5333An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5334
5335Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5336assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5337commands.
5338
5339Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5340at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5341read. This can affect archive searching.
5342
5343@ifset GENERIC
5344@node Machine Dependent
5345@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5346
5347@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5348@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5349sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5350functionality are not listed.
5351
5352@menu
36f63dca
NC
5353@ifset H8300
5354* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5355@end ifset
5356@ifset I960
5357* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5358@end ifset
5359@ifset ARM
5360* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5361@end ifset
5362@ifset HPPA
5363* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5364@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5365@ifset M68K
5366* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5367@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5368@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5369* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5370@end ifset
2469cfa2 5371@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5372* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5373@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5374@ifset M68HC11
5375* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5376@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5377@ifset POWERPC
5378* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5379@end ifset
5380@ifset POWERPC64
5381* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5382@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5383@ifset SPU
5384* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5385@end ifset
74459f0e 5386@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5387* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5388@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5389@ifset WIN32
5390* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5391@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5392@ifset XTENSA
5393* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5394@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5395@end menu
5396@end ifset
5397
252b5132
RH
5398@ifset H8300
5399@ifclear GENERIC
5400@raisesections
5401@end ifclear
5402
5403@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5404@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5405
5406@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5407For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5408you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5409
5410@table @emph
5411@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5412@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5413@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5414targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5415program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5416respectively.
5417
5418@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5419@item synthesizing instructions
5420@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5421@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5422sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5423page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5424(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5425@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5426top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5427
5428@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5429@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5430biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5431which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5432page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5433(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5434@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5435the top page of memory).
5436
5437@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5438@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
543932 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5440changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5441(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5442@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5443the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5444@end table
5445
5446@ifclear GENERIC
5447@lowersections
5448@end ifclear
5449@end ifset
5450
36f63dca 5451@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5452@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5453@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5454@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5455@node Renesas
5456@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5457
c2dcd04e
NC
5458@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5459H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5460options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5461@end ifset
5462@end ifclear
5463
5464@ifset I960
5465@ifclear GENERIC
5466@raisesections
5467@end ifclear
5468
5469@node i960
5470@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5471
5472@cindex i960 support
5473
5474You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5475specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5476family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5477incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5478linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5479libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5480search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5481
5482For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5483well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5484paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5485the names
5486
5487@smallexample
5488@group
5489try
5490libtry.a
5491tryca
5492libtryca.a
5493@end group
5494@end smallexample
5495
5496@noindent
5497The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5498two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5499
5500You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5501the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5502use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5503specifies a library.
5504
5505@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5506@cindex relaxing on i960
5507@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5508you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5509@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5510them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5511instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5512instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5513target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5514not itself call any subroutines).
5515
5516@ifclear GENERIC
5517@lowersections
5518@end ifclear
5519@end ifset
5520
5521@ifset ARM
5522@ifclear GENERIC
5523@raisesections
5524@end ifclear
5525
93fd0973
SC
5526@ifset M68HC11
5527@ifclear GENERIC
5528@raisesections
5529@end ifclear
5530
5531@node M68HC11/68HC12
5532@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5533
5534@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5535
5536@subsection Linker Relaxation
5537
5538For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5539optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5540
5541@table @emph
5542@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5543@item relaxing address modes
5544@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5545targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5546program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5547respectively.
5548
5549@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5550transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5551page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5552
5553@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5554When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5555of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5556addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5557@code{bset} instructions.
5558
5559@end table
5560
5561@subsection Trampoline Generation
5562
5563@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5564@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5565For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5566call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5567will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5568trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5569case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5570point to the function trampoline.
5571
5572@ifclear GENERIC
5573@lowersections
5574@end ifclear
5575@end ifset
5576
36f63dca 5577@node ARM
3674e28a 5578@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5579
5580@cindex ARM interworking support
5581@kindex --support-old-code
5582For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5583between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5584been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5585line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5586libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5587option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5588given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5589which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5590the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5591non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5592
5593@cindex thumb entry point
5594@cindex entry point, thumb
5595@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5596The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5597@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5598But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5599branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5600executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5601
e489d0ae
PB
5602@cindex BE8
5603@kindex --be8
5604The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5605executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5606The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5607
3674e28a
PB
5608@cindex TARGET1
5609@kindex --target1-rel
5610@kindex --target1-abs
5611The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5612@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5613or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5614and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5615
5616@cindex TARGET2
5617@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5618The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5619@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5620meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5621@table @samp
5622@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5623@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5624@item abs
5625@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5626@item got-rel
5627@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5628@end table
5629
319850b4
JB
5630@cindex FIX_V4BX
5631@kindex --fix-v4bx
5632The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5633specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5634interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5635also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5636
5637In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5638linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5639@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5640
5641In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5642relocations are ignored.
5643
845b51d6
PB
5644@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5645@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5646Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5647relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5648
5649@smallexample
5650TST rM, #1
5651MOVEQ PC, rM
5652BX Rn
5653@end smallexample
5654
5655This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5656and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5657condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5658
33bfe774
JB
5659@cindex USE_BLX
5660@kindex --use-blx
5661The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5662BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5663situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5664code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5665each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5666
5667This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5668specify it if you are using that target.
5669
c6dd86c6
JB
5670@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5671@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5672The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5673bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5674instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5675to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5676the support code can read the intended values.
5677
5678The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5679intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5680and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5681intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5682full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5683you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5684
5685If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5686enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5687@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5688mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5689vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5690@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5691
5692If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5693potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5694such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5695first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5696instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5697the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5698are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5699
bf21ed78
MS
5700@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5701@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 5702The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
5703warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5704enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5705linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
5706using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
5707not be diagnosed.
5708
726150b7
NC
5709@cindex PIC_VENEER
5710@kindex --pic-veneer
5711The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5712ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
5713is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
5714@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
5715
5716@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
5717@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5718The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5719code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5720perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
5721placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5722controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
5723The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5724duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
5725group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5726code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5727where they should be placed.
5728
5729The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
5730@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
5731placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed before the first
5732branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
5733placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
5734value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
5735exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
5736A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
5737linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
5738from the input sections.
5739
5740The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
5741@samp{N = +1}.
5742
1a51c1a4
NC
5743Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
5744only, because it relies on object files properties not present
5745otherwise.
5746
36f63dca
NC
5747@ifclear GENERIC
5748@lowersections
5749@end ifclear
5750@end ifset
5751
5752@ifset HPPA
5753@ifclear GENERIC
5754@raisesections
5755@end ifclear
5756
5757@node HPPA ELF32
5758@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
5759@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
5760@kindex --multi-subspace
5761When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
5762import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
5763The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
5764stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
5765multiple sub-spaces.
5766
5767@cindex HPPA stub grouping
5768@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5769Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
5770stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5771@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5772sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5773a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5774the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5775conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5776prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5777A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5778branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5779@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5780@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5781detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5782positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5783
5784Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
5785single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5786create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
5787large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5788
5789@ifclear GENERIC
5790@lowersections
5791@end ifclear
5792@end ifset
5793
7fb9f789
NC
5794@ifset M68K
5795@ifclear GENERIC
5796@raisesections
5797@end ifclear
5798
5799@node M68K
5800@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5801
5802@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
5803@kindex --got=@var{type}
5804The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
5805The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
5806@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
5807the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
5808@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
5809entries only at non-negative offsets.
5810@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
5811entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
5812support such GOTs.
5813@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
5814output file. All GOT references from a single input object
5815file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
5816files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
5817
5818@ifclear GENERIC
5819@lowersections
5820@end ifclear
5821@end ifset
5822
36f63dca
NC
5823@ifset MMIX
5824@ifclear GENERIC
5825@raisesections
5826@end ifclear
5827
5828@node MMIX
5829@section @code{ld} and MMIX
5830For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
5831@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
5832understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
5833can translate between the two formats.
5834
5835There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
5836Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
5837registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
5838equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
5839@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
5840global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
5841this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
5842symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
5843
7a2de473
HPN
5844Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
5845@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
5846The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
5847of a section.
36f63dca
NC
5848
5849Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
5850are left out from an mmo file.
5851
5852@ifclear GENERIC
5853@lowersections
5854@end ifclear
5855@end ifset
5856
5857@ifset MSP430
5858@ifclear GENERIC
5859@raisesections
5860@end ifclear
5861
5862@node MSP430
5863@section @code{ld} and MSP430
5864For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
5865will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
5866just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
5867
5868@cindex MSP430 extra sections
5869The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
5870
5871@table @code
5872@item @samp{.vectors}
5873Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
5874
5875@item @samp{.bootloader}
5876Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
5877in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5878
5879@item @samp{.infomem}
5880Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
5881this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5882
c0065db7 5883@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
5884This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
5885in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
5886
5887@item @samp{.noinit}
5888Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
5889
c0065db7 5890The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
5891@end table
5892
5893@ifclear GENERIC
5894@lowersections
5895@end ifclear
5896@end ifset
5897
2a60a7a8
AM
5898@ifset POWERPC
5899@ifclear GENERIC
5900@raisesections
5901@end ifclear
5902
5903@node PowerPC ELF32
5904@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5905@cindex PowerPC long branches
5906@kindex --relax on PowerPC
5907Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
5908displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
5909@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
5910@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
5911the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
5912section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
5913section exceeds 33M in size.
5914
5915@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
5916@table @option
5917@cindex PowerPC PLT
5918@kindex --bss-plt
5919@item --bss-plt
5920Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
5921generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
5922the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
5923writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
5924@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
5925PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
5926compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
5927BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
5928
016687f8
AM
5929@kindex --secure-plt
5930@item --secure-plt
5931@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
5932@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
5933when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
5934layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
5935style BSS PLT.
5936
2a60a7a8
AM
5937@cindex PowerPC GOT
5938@kindex --sdata-got
5939@item --sdata-got
5940The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
5941sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
5942@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
5943section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
5944@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
5945@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
5946@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
5947@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
5948PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
5949pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
5950GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
5951really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
5952
5953@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
5954@kindex --emit-stub-syms
5955@item --emit-stub-syms
5956This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
5957symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
5958
5959@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
5960@kindex --no-tls-optimize
5961@item --no-tls-optimize
5962PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
5963sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
5964disable the optimization.
5965@end table
5966
5967@ifclear GENERIC
5968@lowersections
5969@end ifclear
5970@end ifset
5971
5972@ifset POWERPC64
5973@ifclear GENERIC
5974@raisesections
5975@end ifclear
5976
5977@node PowerPC64 ELF64
5978@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5979
5980@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
5981@table @option
5982@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
5983@kindex --stub-group-size
5984@item --stub-group-size
5985Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
5986by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5987@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5988sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5989a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5990the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5991conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5992prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5993A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5994branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5995@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5996@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5997detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5998positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5999
6000Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6001single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6002create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6003large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6004
6005@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6006@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6007@item --emit-stub-syms
6008This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6009symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6010
6011@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6012@kindex --dotsyms
6013@kindex --no-dotsyms
6014@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6015These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6016in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6017function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6018code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6019properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6020to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6021@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6022dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6023feature.
6024
6025@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6026@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6027@item --no-tls-optimize
6028PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6029sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6030disable the optimization.
6031
6032@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6033@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6034@item --no-opd-optimize
6035PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6036corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6037the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6038Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6039
6040@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6041@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6042@item --non-overlapping-opd
6043Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6044@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6045the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6046entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6047
6048@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6049@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6050@item --no-toc-optimize
6051PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6052entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6053reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6054marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6055marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6056relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6057unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6058reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6059discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6060reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6061code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6062optimization.
6063
6064@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6065@kindex --no-multi-toc
6066@item --no-multi-toc
6067By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6068entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6069total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6070grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6071TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6072calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6073help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
607464K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6075Use this option to turn off this feature.
6076@end table
6077
6078@ifclear GENERIC
6079@lowersections
6080@end ifclear
6081@end ifset
6082
49fa1e15
AM
6083@ifset SPU
6084@ifclear GENERIC
6085@raisesections
6086@end ifclear
6087
6088@node SPU ELF
6089@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6090
6091@cindex SPU ELF options
6092@table @option
6093
6094@cindex SPU plugins
6095@kindex --plugin
6096@item --plugin
6097This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6098
6099@cindex SPU overlays
6100@kindex --no-overlays
6101@item --no-overlays
6102Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6103regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6104@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6105turns off all this special overlay handling.
6106
6107@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6108@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6109@item --emit-stub-syms
6110This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6111symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6112
6113@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6114@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6115@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6116This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6117function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6118on calls to non-overlay regions.
6119
6120@cindex SPU local store size
6121@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6122@item --local-store=lo:hi
6123@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6124the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6125range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6126
c0065db7 6127@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6128@kindex --stack-analysis
6129@item --stack-analysis
6130SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6131unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6132under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6133@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6134@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6135determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6136for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6137for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6138for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6139find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6140and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6141under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6142dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6143is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6144and calls will be given.
6145
c0065db7 6146@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6147@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6148@item --emit-stack-syms
6149This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6150in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6151These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6152functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6153functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6154such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6155The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6156@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6157@end table
6158
6159@ifclear GENERIC
6160@lowersections
6161@end ifclear
6162@end ifset
6163
36f63dca
NC
6164@ifset TICOFF
6165@ifclear GENERIC
6166@raisesections
6167@end ifclear
6168
6169@node TI COFF
6170@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6171@cindex TI COFF versions
6172@kindex --format=@var{version}
6173The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6174TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6175also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6176format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6177header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6178
6179@ifclear GENERIC
6180@lowersections
6181@end ifclear
6182@end ifset
6183
2ca22b03
NC
6184@ifset WIN32
6185@ifclear GENERIC
6186@raisesections
6187@end ifclear
6188
6189@node WIN32
6190@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6191
c0065db7 6192This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6193See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6194command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6195
6196@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6197@cindex import libraries
6198@item import libraries
69da35b5 6199The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6200libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6201regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6202archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6203support for creating such libraries provided with the
6204@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6205
c0065db7
RM
6206@item exporting DLL symbols
6207@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6208The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6209
6210@table @emph
6211@item using auto-export functionality
6212@cindex using auto-export functionality
6213By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6214which is controlled by the following command line options:
6215
0a5d968e
NC
6216@itemize
6217@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6218@item --exclude-symbols
6219@item --exclude-libs
6220@end itemize
6221
c0065db7 6222If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6223command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6224if either of the following are true:
6225
6226@itemize
6227@item A DEF file is used.
6228@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6229@end itemize
dc8465bf 6230
c0065db7
RM
6231@item using a DEF file
6232@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6233Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6234an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6235exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6236name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6237command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6238
6239@example
6240gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6241@end example
6242
0a5d968e
NC
6243Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6244@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6245
dc8465bf
NC
6246Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6247
6248@example
4b5bd4e7 6249LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6250
6251EXPORTS
6252foo
6253bar
6254_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6255another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6256var1 DATA
c0065db7 6257@end example
dc8465bf 6258
4b5bd4e7
DS
6259This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6260symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6261alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6262by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6263@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6264@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6265
6b31ad16
DS
6266The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6267name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6268the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6269
b45619c0
NC
6270When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6271library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6272@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6273executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6274
6275With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6276specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6277non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6278
6279If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6280or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6281filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6282
4b5bd4e7
DS
6283The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6284
6285@example
6286EXPORTS
6287 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6288 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6289 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6290@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6291
6292Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6293@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6294@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6295@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6296Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6297@samp{<integer>} alias.
6298
6299The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6300
6301@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6302will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6303by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6304linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6305library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6306
6307@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6308The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6309the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6310@code{*_imp__foo}).
6311
6312@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6313well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6314read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6315variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6316the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6317extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6318application will behave unexpectedly.
6319
6320@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6321it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6322symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6323API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6324the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6325
4b5bd4e7
DS
6326See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6327other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6328
6329@cindex creating a DEF file
6330While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6331with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6332
6333@item Using decorations
6334@cindex Using decorations
6335Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6336itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6337declared as:
6338
6339@example
6340__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6341__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6342@end example
6343
6344All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6345any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6346this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6347the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6348
6349Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6350decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6351instead:
6352
6353@example
6354__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6355__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6356@end example
6357
c0065db7
RM
6358This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6359when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6360variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6361code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6362of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6363omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6364@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6365information.
c0065db7 6366@end table
dc8465bf 6367
2ca22b03
NC
6368@cindex automatic data imports
6369@item automatic data imports
6370The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6371by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6372compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6373issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6374code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6375c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6376initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6377decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6378platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6379command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6380The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6381suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6382trigger the feature's use.
6383
c0065db7 6384auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6385additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6386
c0065db7 6387"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6388documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6389
c0065db7
RM
6390The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6391occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6392One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6393below.
6394
6395@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6396For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6397object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6398offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6399field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6400in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6401without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6402The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6403references.
6404
c0065db7
RM
6405The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6406be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6407themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6408runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6409compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6410support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6411run without error on an older system.
6412
c0065db7
RM
6413@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6414enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6415
6416@cindex direct linking to a dll
6417@item direct linking to a dll
6418The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6419including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6420libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6421traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6422libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6423function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6424though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6425storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6426tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6427large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6428
c0065db7 6429Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6430@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6431of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6432perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6433select the dll instead of an import library.
6434
2ca22b03 6435
69da35b5
NC
6436For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6437to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6438
6439@example
45e948fe
NC
6440libxxx.dll.a
6441xxx.dll.a
6442libxxx.a
6443xxx.lib
69da35b5 6444cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6445libxxx.dll
6446xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6447@end example
6448
69da35b5
NC
6449before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6450
c0065db7
RM
6451(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6452where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6453@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6454file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6455@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6456
c0065db7
RM
6457Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6458@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6459was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6460various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6461could coexist on the same machine.
6462
2ca22b03
NC
6463The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6464applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6465libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6466
6467@example
6468bin/
6469 cygxxx.dll
6470lib/
6471 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6472 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6473@end example
6474
c0065db7
RM
6475Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6476done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6477
64781. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6479@example
6480gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6481@end example
2ca22b03 6482
69da35b5
NC
6483However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6484(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6485@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6486not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6487
2ca22b03
NC
64882. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6489directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6490should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6491making the app/dll.
6492
6493@example
6494ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6495@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6496
6497Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6498
6499@example
6500gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6501@end example
69da35b5
NC
6502
6503This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6504perfectly legal
6505
6506@example
6507bin/
6508 cygxxx-5.dll
6509lib/
c0065db7 6510 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6511@end example
6512
dc8465bf 6513Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6514even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6515@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6516
6517Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6518wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6519
65201. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6521work with auto-imported data.
6522
dc8465bf
NC
65232. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6524import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6525symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6526for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6527possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6528
45e948fe
NC
65293. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6530critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6531in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6532stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6533
69da35b5 6534So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6535true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6536a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6537binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6538massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6539requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6540will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6541
c0065db7 6542@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6543@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6544@item adding additional names
6545Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6546A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6547exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6548when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6549import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6550
c0065db7 6551@example
dc8465bf
NC
6552LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6553
6554EXPORTS
c0065db7 6555foo
dc8465bf 6556_foo = foo
c0065db7 6557@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6558
6559The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6560
6561Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6562source code using the "weak" attribute:
6563
c0065db7
RM
6564@example
6565void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6566void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6567@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6568
6569See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6570symbols.
6571
6572@item renaming symbols
6573Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6574kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6575@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6576DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6577created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6578
c0065db7 6579@example
dc8465bf
NC
6580LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6581
6582EXPORTS
6583_foo = foo
c0065db7 6584@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6585
6586The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6587@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6588@end table
dc8465bf 6589
0a5d968e 6590Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6591unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6592If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6593@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6594that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6595@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6596renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6597to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6598the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6599In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6600which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6601
6602@cindex weak externals
6603@item weak externals
6604The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6605weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6606defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6607are three variants of weak externals:
6608@itemize
6609@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6610called lazy externals.
6611@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6612This form is not presently implemented.
6613@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6614implemented.
6615@end itemize
6616As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6617are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6618uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6619@end table
6620
6621@ifclear GENERIC
6622@lowersections
6623@end ifclear
6624@end ifset
6625
e0001a05
NC
6626@ifset XTENSA
6627@ifclear GENERIC
6628@raisesections
6629@end ifclear
6630
6631@node Xtensa
6632@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6633
6634@cindex Xtensa processors
6635The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6636@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6637specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6638keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6639example, with the command:
6640
6641@smallexample
6642SECTIONS
6643@{
6644 .text : @{
6645 *(.literal .text)
6646 @}
6647@}
6648@end smallexample
6649
6650@noindent
6651@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6652and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6653literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6654interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6655group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6656files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6657and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6658
43cd72b9 6659@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6660@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6661Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6662provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6663is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6664literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6665will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6666location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6667the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6668unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6669@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6670range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6671
6672For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6673to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6674instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6675instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6676instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6677@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6678hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6679By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6680switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6681density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6682instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6683performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6684linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6685a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6686
6687The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6688control the linker:
6689
6690@cindex Xtensa options
6691@table @option
e0001a05 6692@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
6693@item --no-relax
6694Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6695by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
6696relaxation.
6697
6698@item --size-opt
6699When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
6700more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
6701no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
6702alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
6703preserve the correctness of the code.
6704@end table
e0001a05
NC
6705
6706@ifclear GENERIC
6707@lowersections
6708@end ifclear
6709@end ifset
6710
252b5132
RH
6711@ifclear SingleFormat
6712@node BFD
6713@chapter BFD
6714
6715@cindex back end
6716@cindex object file management
6717@cindex object formats available
6718@kindex objdump -i
6719The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6720These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6721object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
6722format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6723it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6724associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6725object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
6726(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
6727list all the formats available for your configuration.
6728
6729@cindex BFD requirements
6730@cindex requirements for BFD
6731As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
6732several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
6733BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
6734formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
6735been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
6736BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
6737may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
6738
6739One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
6740mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
6741useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
6742conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
6743
6744@menu
6745* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
6746@end menu
6747
6748@node BFD outline
36f63dca 6749@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
6750@cindex opening object files
6751@include bfdsumm.texi
6752@end ifclear
6753
6754@node Reporting Bugs
6755@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
6756@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
6757@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 6758
ff5dcc92 6759Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
6760
6761Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
6762it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 6763to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 6764work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 6765@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6766
6767In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
6768information that enables us to fix the bug.
6769
6770@menu
6771* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
6772* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
6773@end menu
6774
6775@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 6776@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
6777@cindex bug criteria
6778
6779If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
6780
6781@itemize @bullet
6782@cindex fatal signal
6783@cindex linker crash
6784@cindex crash of linker
6785@item
6786If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 6787@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
6788
6789@cindex error on valid input
6790@item
ff5dcc92 6791If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
6792
6793@cindex invalid input
6794@item
ff5dcc92 6795If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
6796may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
6797object files are correct.
6798
6799@item
6800If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 6801improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
6802@end itemize
6803
6804@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 6805@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 6806@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 6807@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
6808
6809A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 6810products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
6811recommend you contact that organization first.
6812
6813You can find contact information for many support companies and
6814individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
6815distribution.
6816
ad22bfe8 6817@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 6818Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
6819@value{BUGURL}.
6820@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6821
6822The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
6823@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
6824fact or leave it out, state it!
6825
6826Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
6827problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
6828assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
6829matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
6830the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
6831location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
6832were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
6833into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
6834specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 6835and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
6836
6837Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
6838the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
6839on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
6840
6841Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
6842bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
6843respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
6844You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
6845
6846To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
6847
6848@itemize @bullet
6849@item
ff5dcc92 6850The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
6851the @samp{--version} argument.
6852
6853Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 6854the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6855
6856@item
ff5dcc92 6857Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
6858patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
6859
6860@item
6861The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
6862version number.
6863
6864@item
ff5dcc92 6865What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
6866``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
6867
6868@item
6869The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
6870observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
6871list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
6872sufficient.
6873
6874If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
6875and then we might not encounter the bug.
6876
6877@item
6878A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
6879bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
6880provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
6881bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
6882state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
6883requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
6884we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
6885attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
6886
6887If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
6888@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
6889object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
6890@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
6891how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
6892
6893@item
6894A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
6895incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
6896
ff5dcc92 6897Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
6898will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
6899not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
6900a chance to make a mistake.
6901
6902Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
6903say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 6904copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
6905C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
6906and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
6907fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
6908you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
6909any conclusion from our observations.
6910
6911@item
ff5dcc92 6912If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
6913diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
6914@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 6915If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
6916context, not by line number.
6917
6918The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
6919sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
6920@end itemize
6921
6922Here are some things that are not necessary:
6923
6924@itemize @bullet
6925@item
6926A description of the envelope of the bug.
6927
6928Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
6929which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
6930changes will not affect it.
6931
6932This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
6933will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
6934with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
6935We recommend that you save your time for something else.
6936
6937Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
6938of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
6939output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
6940less time, and so on.
6941
6942However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
6943report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
6944
6945@item
6946A patch for the bug.
6947
6948A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
6949the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
6950a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
6951to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
6952
ff5dcc92 6953Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
6954construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
6955through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
6956able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
6957fixed.
6958
6959And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
6960patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
6961help us to understand.
6962
6963@item
6964A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
6965
6966Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
6967things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
6968@end itemize
6969
6970@node MRI
6971@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
6972@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
6973To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
6974linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
6975alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
6976described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
6977simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 6978@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
6979linker commands; these commands are described here.
6980
6981In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
6982file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
6983features to make use of them.
6984
6985You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
6986@samp{-c} command-line option.
6987
6988Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
6989command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
6990blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 6991MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
6992issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
6993
6994Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
6995
6996You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
6997lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
6998The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
6999
7000@table @code
7001@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7002@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7003@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7004Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7005the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7006@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7007your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7008script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7009commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7010input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7011@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7012
7013@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7014@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7015Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7016in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7017
7018@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7019
7020@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7021@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7022Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7023@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7024
7025@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7026@item BASE @var{expression}
7027Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7028absolute addresses) in the output file.
7029
7030@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7031@item CHIP @var{expression}
7032@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7033This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7034
7035@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7036@item END
7037This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7038
7039@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7040@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7041Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7042language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7043
7044@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7045@item
252b5132
RH
7046S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7047
7048@item
7049IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7050
7051@item
7052COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7053@samp{COFF}
7054@end enumerate
7055
7056@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7057@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7058Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7059@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7060
7061The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7062same line, with no change in its effect.
7063
7064@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7065@item LOAD @var{filename}
7066@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7067Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7068same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7069command line.
7070
7071@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7072@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7073@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7074MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7075option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7076
7077@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7078@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7079@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7080Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7081order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7082script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7083sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7084file, in the order specified.
7085
7086@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7087@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7088@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7089@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7090Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7091@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7092
7093@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7094@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7095@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7096@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7097You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7098specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7099If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7100@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7101@end table
7102
36f63dca 7103@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7104
370b66a1
CD
7105@node LD Index
7106@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7107
7108@printindex cp
7109
7110@tex
7111% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7112% meantime:
7113\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7114\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7115\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7116\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7117\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7118\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7119\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7120\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7121\page\colophon
7122% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7123@end tex
7124
252b5132 7125@bye
This page took 0.833598 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.